SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL … · a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for

SECTION 26 00 00 Page 1

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM D 709 (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting

Materials

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2007; INT 2008) National

Electrical Safety Code IEEE C57.12.28 (2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment -

Enclosure Integrity IEEE C57.12.29 (2005) Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure

Integrity for Coastal Environments IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE

Standards Terms

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA 250 (2003) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code -

2008 Edition NFPA 101 (2008) Life Safety Code, 2006 Edition

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS This section applies to other sections ofthe project specifications and to all sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.

Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT


1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.

b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification

sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types.

c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in

PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and test methods.

1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Electrical characteristics for this project shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Final connections to the power distribution system shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer.

1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.

1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02) Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03) Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.6.2 Standard Products


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.

1.6.2.1 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.

1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.7 WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following:

a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each

principal system and item of equipment.

b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.

c. Safety precautions.

d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.

e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of

each system or item of equipment. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.


1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

1.11 WARNING SIGNS Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators, and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be

in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for pad-mounted transformers and pad-mounted SF6 switches, provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.

b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the fence.

Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 14 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT" printed in three lines of nominal 3 inch high white letters on a red and black field.

1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, NFPA 101 and requirements specified herein.

1.13 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government


for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.

-- End of Section --



SECTION 26 05 48.00 10

SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC 325 (2005) Manual of Steel Construction


ASTM E 580/E 580M (2008a) Application of Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

UFC 3-310-04 (2007) Seismic Design for Buildings

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 1598 (2008) Luminaires

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 General Requirements The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section shall be applied to the electrical equipment and systems listed below. Structural requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.

1.2.2 Electrical Equipment Electrical equipment shall include the following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:

Control Panels Air Handling Units Pumps with Motors Switchgear Light Fixtures Unit Substations Motor Control Centers Transformers Switchboards (Floor Mounted) Storage Racks Solar Heating Units

1.2.3 Electrical Systems


Electrical systems shall be installed as required on the drawings and other sections of these specifications and shall be seismically protected in accordance with this specification.

1.2.4 Contractor Designed Bracing The Contractor shall design the bracing in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and additional data furnished by the Contracting Officer. Resistance to lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads. UFC 3-310-04 uses parameters for the building, not for the equipment in the building; therefore, corresponding adjustments to the formulas shall be required. Loadings determined using UFC 3-310-04 are based on strength design; therefore, AISC 325 shall be used for the design. The bracing for electrical equipment and systems shall be developed by the Contractor.

1.2.5 Conduits Requiring No Special Seismic Restraints Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical conduit less than 2-1/2 inches trade size. All other interior conduit, shall be seismically protected as specified.

1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 Rigidly Mounted Equipment Specific items of equipment furnished under this contract shall be constructed and assembled to withstand the seismic forces specified in UFC 3-310-04. Each item of rigid electrical equipment shall be entirely located and rigidly attached on one side only of a building expansion joint. Piping, electrical conduit, etc., which cross the expansion joint shall be provided with flexible joints that are capable of accommodating displacements equal to the full width of the joint in both orthogonal directions.

Engine-Generators Substations Transformers Switch Boards and Switch Gears Motor Control Centers Free Standing Electric Motors

1.3.2 Nonrigid or Flexibly-Mounted Equipment Specific items of equipment to be furnished as stated in the Delivery or Task Order shall be constructed and assembled to resist a horizontal lateral force of 0.75 times the operating weight of the equipment at the vertical center of gravity of the equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Lighting Fixtures in Buildings; G Equipment Requirements; G

Detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed. Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. Drawings shall show the structural or physical features of major equipment items, components, assemblies, and structures, including foundations or other types of supports for equipment and conductors. These drawings shall include accurately scaled or dimensioned outline and arrangement or layout drawings to show the physical size of equipment and components and the relative arrangement and physical connection of related components. Weights of equipment, components and assemblies shall be provided when required to verify the adequacy of design and proposed construction of foundations or other types of supports. Dynamic forces shall be stated for switching devices when such forces must be considered in the design of support structures. The appropriate detail drawings shall show the provisions for leveling, anchoring, and connecting all items during installation, and shall include any recommendations made by the manufacturerInclude sway bracing for suspended luminaires.

SD-03 Product Data

Lighting Fixtures in Buildings; G Equipment Requirements; G

Copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from the brace.

Contractor Designed Bracing; G

Copies of the Design Calculations with the Drawings. Calculations shall be approved, certified, stamped and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer. Calculations shall verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from the brace.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORTS Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to UL 1598.

2.2 SWAY BRACING MATERIALS Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall be as specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SWAY BRACES FOR CONDUIT Conduit shall be braced as for an equivalent weight pipe in accordance with Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.

3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the following:

3.2.1 Pendant Fixtures Pendant fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.

3.2.2 Ceiling Attached Fixtures 3.2.2.1 Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures Recessed fluorescent individual or continuous-row mounted fixtures shall be supported by a seismic-resistant suspended ceiling support system built in accordance with ASTM E 580/E 580M or Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04. Recessed lighting fixtures not over 56 poundsin weight may be supported by and attached directly to the ceiling system runners using screws or bolts, number and size as required by the seismic design. Fixture accessories, including louvers, diffusers, and lenses shall have lock or screw attachments.

3.2.2.2 Surface-Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures Surface-mounted fluorescent individual or continuous-row fixtures shall be attached to a seismic-resistant ceiling support system built in accordance with ASTM E 580/E 580M or Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.

3.2.3 Assembly Mounted on Outlet Box A supporting assembly, that is intended to be mounted on an outlet box, shall be designed to accommodate mounting features on 4 inch boxes, plaster rings, and fixture studs.

3.2.4 Wall-Mounted Emergency Light Unit Attachments for wall-mounted emergency light units shall be designed and secured for the worst expected seismic disturbance at the site.

3.2.5 Lateral Force Structural requirements for light fixture bracing shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANIOUS EQUIPMENT.




JBLM DESIGN STANDARDS SECTION 26 20 00 - INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Design Requirements

a. Fire alarm panels, transmitters, Interruptible Power Source (IPS) and Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS) units, and other sensitive electrical or electronic equipment shall be installed in dedicated electrical equipment rooms readily accessible to maintenance personnel independent of building occupants (i.e., space accessible from exterior of facility), not in mechanical spaces or other areas subject to excessive temperature and moisture.

b. Include space and dedicated circuits for vending machines and receptacles for floor buffers in barracks designs. As a minimum base corridor and general cleaning receptacle spacing on use of equipment with 25-foot cords.

c. Electrical design for troop barracks shall provide adequate capacity and branch circuits per individual room to support installation of appliances to include refrigerators, microwave ovens, and coffee makers.

d. Provide for communication service (telephone/modem and network) in electrical and mechanical equipment room(s) for remote monitoring and control functions.

e. When designing for electrical loads in a laundry facility in a barracks, assume all the washers and dryers will be operating at the same time. Plan for 100% load.

f. All buildings in which DDC systems are installed or in which DDC systems will be installed shall have a Lon Works compatible meter installed at each electrical service. All buildings without a DDC system shall have a meter with a Modbus RTU/RS485 digital output installed at each electrical service. See Changes or Criteria Notes to UF Guide Specifications.

g. An outlet device shall have an ampere rating that is not less than that of the branch circuit it is installed on. In the case of two or more outlet devices installed on an individual branch circuit, each outlet device shall have the same ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit overcurrent protection device.

h. All raceways will require a separate equipment grounding/bonding conductor rather than using the raceway as a grounding/bonding path.

i. Do not use set-screw type conduit fittings on any type EMT conduit. Install only compression fittings with EMT.

Notes to Designers on Drawing Content

a. Indicate available fault currents 10,000 AIC and above on power riser diagram.

b. Provide "Connected and Demand Load Summary Schedule" on Power Riser Diagram Drawing.

SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI C12.7 (2005) Requirements for Watthour Meter

Sockets

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM B 1 (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for

Hard-Drawn Copper Wire ASTM B 8 (2004) Standard Specification for Concentric-

Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D 709 (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting

Materials


Electrical Safety Code IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE

Standards Terms IEEE Std 81 (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,

Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1)Normal Measurements

INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2003) Acceptance Testing Specifications

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA 250 (2003) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum) NEMA BU 1.1 (2005) General Instructions for Proper

Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less

NEMA C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters; Code for Electricity

Metering NEMA C80.1 (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel

Conduit (ERSC)


NEMA C80.3 (2005) Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

NEMA C80.5 (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum

Conduit (ERAC) NEMA FU 1 (2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for

Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006)

Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control Equipment

NEMA ICS 3 (2005) Standard for Industrial Control and

Systems: Medium Voltage Controllers Rated 2001 to 7200 Volts AC

NEMA ICS 4 (2005) Industrial Control and Systems:

Terminal Blocks NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial

Controls and Systems Enclosures NEMA KS 1 (2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous

Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum)

NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and

Generators NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for

Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors

NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for

Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors NEMA RN 1 (2005) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type

Transformers for General Applications NEMA TC 14 (2002) Standard for Reinforced Thermosetting

Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings NEMA TC 2 (2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit


NEMA TC 3 (2004) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TP 1 (2002) Guide for Determining Energy

Efficiency for Distribution Transformers NEMA VE 1 (2002) Standard for Metallic Cable Tray

Systems NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2005) Standard for General

Requirements for Wiring Devices NEMA WD 6 (2002; R 2008) Standard for Wiring Devices -

Dimensional Requirements NEMA Z535.4 (2007; Errata 2007) Product Safety Signs and

Labels


2008 Edition NFPA 70E (2008) Electrical Safety in the Workplace

NFPA 780 (2007) Standard for the Installation of

Lightning Protection Systems

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) TIA J-STD-607-A (2002) Commercial Building Grounding

(Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

TIA/EIA-568-B.1 (2001 Addendums 2001, 2003, 2003, 2003, 2004,

2007) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements

TIA/EIA-569-A (1998; Addenda 2000, 2001) Commercial

Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag

Out)

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1 (2005; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for

Flexible Metal Conduit UL 1010 (2006) Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use

in Hazardous (Classified) Locations


UL 1063 (2006) Standard for Safety Machine-Tools Wires and Cables

UL 1242 (2006; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel

UL 1449 (2006) Surge Protective Devices

UL 1561 (1999; Rev thru Sep 2005) Dry-Type General

Purpose and Power Transformers UL 1569 (1999; Rev thru Nov 2006) Metal-Clad Cables

UL 1699 (1999; Rev thru May 2003) Arc-Fault Circuit-

Interrupters UL 198M (2003; Rev thru Oct 2007) Mine-Duty Fuses

UL 20 (2000 ; Rev thru Dec 2004) Standard for

General-Use Snap Switches UL 2043 (2008) Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke

Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces

UL 360 (2003; Rev thru Jul 2007) Liquid-Tight

Flexible Steel Conduit UL 4 (2004) Armored Cable

UL 44 (2005; Rev thru Nov 2005) Thermoset-Insulated

Wires and Cables UL 467 (2007) Standard for Grounding and Bonding

Equipment UL 486A-486B (2003; Rev thru Aug 2006) Standard for Wire

Connectors UL 486C (2004; Rev thru Aug 2006) Standard for

Splicing Wire Connectors UL 489 (2002; Rev thru Jun 2006) Standard for

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 498 (2001; Rev thru Nov 2007) Attachment Plugs

and Receptacles UL 5 (2004; Rev thru May 2007) Surface Metal

Raceways and Fittings UL 50 (2007) Standard for Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment


UL 506 (2000; Rev thru May 2006) Standard for Specialty Transformers

UL 508 (1999; Rev thru Sep 2008) Standard for

Industrial Control Equipment UL 510 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2005) Polyvinyl Chloride,

Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape UL 512 (1993; Rev thru Jan 2008) Fuseholders

UL 514A (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for

Metallic Outlet Boxes UL 514B (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for

Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings UL 514C (1996; Rev thru Jul 2008) Nonmetallic Outlet

Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers UL 5A (2003; Rev thru Aug 2008) Nonmetallic Surface

Raceways and Fittings UL 6 (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal

Conduit-Steel UL 651 (2005; Rev thru May 2007) Standard for

Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings

UL 67 (1993; Rev thru Jul 2008) Standard for

Panelboards UL 674 (2003; Rev thru Oct 2007) Standard for

Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 698 (2006) Industrial Control Equipment for

Hazardous (Classified) Locations UL 6A (2000; Rev thru Jan 2004) Electrical Rigid

Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel

UL 719 (2006; Rev thru Oct 2007) Nonmetallic-

Sheathed Cables UL 797 (2007) Standard for Electrical Metallic

Tubing -- Steel UL 817 (2001; Rev thru May 2007) Cord Sets and

Power-Supply Cords UL 83 (20086) Standard for Thermoplastic-Insulated

Wires and Cables


UL 845 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2006) Standard for Motor Control Centers

UL 854 (2004; Rev thru Oct 2007) Service-Entrance

Cables UL 857 (2001; Rev thru Nov 2002) Busways

UL 869A (2006) Reference Standard for Service

Equipment UL 870 (1995; Rev thru Jul 2003) Standard for

Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings

UL 877 (1993; Rev thru Nov 1999) Circuit Breakers

and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 886 (1994; Rev thru Nov 2005) Outlet Boxes and

Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 943 (2006; Rev thru Feb 2008) Ground-Fault

Circuit-Interrupters UL 984 (1996; Rev thru Sept 2005) Hermetic

Refrigerant Motor-Compressors 1.2 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Panelboards; G

Transformers; G

Busway; G

Cable trays; G

Motor control centers; G

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control


panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Include diagrams and schematics or elementary diagrams of each electrical system; internal wiring and field connection diagrams of each electrical device when published by the manufacturer; wiring diagrams of cabinets, panels, units, or separate mountings; interconnection diagrams that show the wiring between separate components of assemblies; field connection diagrams that show the termination of wiring routed between separate items of equipment; internal wiring diagrams of equipment showing wiring as actually provided for this project. Field wiring connections shall be clearly identified. Detail drawings shall consist of equipment drawings, illustrations, schedules, instructions, diagrams, and other information necessary to define the installation. Detail drawings shall show the rating of items and systems and how the components of an item and system are assembled, function together, and how they will be installed on the project. Data and drawings for component parts of an item or system shall be coordinated and submitted as a unit. Data and drawings shall be coordinated and included in a single submission. Multiple submissions for the same equipment or system are not acceptable except where prior approval has been obtained from the Contracting Officer. In such cases, a list of data to be submitted later shall be included with the first submission. Detail drawings shall show physical arrangement, construction details, connections, finishes, materials used in fabrication, provisions for conduit or busway entrance, access requirements for installation and maintenance, physical size, electrical characteristics, foundation and support details, and equipment weight. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and/or dimensioned. Optional items shall be clearly identified as included or excluded. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, complete details of such departures, including changes in related portions of the project and the reasons why, shall be submitted with the detail drawings. Approved departures shall be made at no additional cost to the Government

Wireways; G

Marking strips drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Steel or PVC Conduit; G Submit manufacturer documentation indicating type of recovered materials and the percentage of such material that is (1) recovered and (2) postconsumer recycled content. Alternately, submit written justification of non-use per Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.

Receptacles; G

Circuit breakers; G

Switches; G

Transformers; G


Enclosed circuit breakers; G

Polyphase Squirrel-cage Medium Induction Motors; G Submit Manufacturer documentation demonstrating that the motor meets the premium efficiency rating requirements in accordance with NEMA MG-1.

Motor controllers; G

Combination motor controllers; G

Manual motor starters; G

Metering; G

CATV outlets; G

Telecommunications Grounding Busbar; G

Surge protective devices; G

Submittals shall include performance and characteristic curves, and data composed of catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specifications, product data, and printed information in sufficient detail and scope to verify compliance with the requirements of the contract documents. Provide a complete itemized listing of equipment and materials proposed for incorporation into the work. Each entry shall include an item number, the quantity of items proposed, and the name of the manufacturer of each item.

SD-06 Test Reports

600-volt wiring test; G

Grounding system test; G

Transformer tests; G

Ground-fault receptacle test; G

SD-07 Certificates

Fuses; G

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Transformer factory tests; G

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Electrical Systems, Data Package 5; G

Metering, Data Package 5; G


Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein. Procedures shall include diagrams, instructions, and precautions required to install, adjust, calibrate, and test devices and equipment.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Record Documentation; G

In addition to other requirements, provide in accordance with paragraph RECORD DOCUMENTATION.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Fuses Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.

1.4.2 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.4.3 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.




1.5 MAINTENANCE 1.5.1 Record Documentation Record Drawings shall be provided as a record of the construction as installed. The drawings shall include all the information shown on the contract drawings, deviations, modifications, and changes from the contract drawings, however minor. The as-built drawings shall be kept at the job site and updated daily. Drawings shall be in AUTOCAD (.dwg) format using the AUTOCAD 2008 or earlier. The as-built drawings shall be a full-sized set of prints marked to reflect all deviations, changes, and modifications. The as-built drawings shall be complete and show the location, size, dimensions, part identification, and other information. Additional sheets may be added. The as-built drawings shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by the Contractor's quality control representative and by the Contracting Officer prior to the submission of each monthly pay estimate. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit three full sized sets of the marked prints to the Contracting Officer for approval. If upon review, the as-built drawings are found to contain errors and/or omissions, they will be returned to the Contractor for correction. The Contractor shall correct and return the as-built drawings to the Contracting Officer for approval within ten calendar days from the time the drawings are returned to the Contractor

1.5.2 Electrical Systems Submit two complete hard copies and one electronic copy in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format on CD or DVD of operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building. This shall include:

a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.

b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC,

covered elsewhere).

c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment.


1.7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS Seismic details shall conform to Section 13 48 00, SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and to Section 26 05 48.00 10, SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT


Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70.

2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Conduit materials shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. Shall conform to the following:

2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit 2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit NEMA C80.1, UL 6.

2.2.1.2 Rigid Aluminum Conduit NEMA C80.5, UL 6A.

2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit PVC Type EPC-40 and EPC-80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651, or fiberglass conduit, in accordance with NEMA TC 14.

2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.

2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT) UL 797, NEMA C80.3.

2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit NEMA RN 1, Type 40(40 mils thick).

2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 1.

2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel UL 360.

2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit UL 514B. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B.

2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.

2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT


Steel or Die cast compression type. 2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.

2.2.9 Steel or PVC Conduit Steel and PVC conduit materials shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.

2.3 SURFACE RACEWAY 2.3.1 Surface Metal Raceway UL 5, two-piece painted steel, totally enclosed, snap-cover type. Provide multiple outlet-type raceway with grounding-type receptacle where indicated. Receptacles shall be as specified herein and shall be spaced and wired as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.3.2 Surface Nonmetallic Raceway UL 5A, nonmetallic totally enclosed, snap-cover type. Provide multiple outlet-type raceway with grounding-type receptacle where indicated. Receptacles shall be as specified herein and shall be spaced and wired as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.4 BUSWAY NEMA BU 1.1, UL 857. Buses shall be copper, with ratings as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, and shall include integral or internal ground bus. Short circuit rating shall be root mean square (rms) symmetrical amperes minimum as indicated. Busway systems shall be suitable for the installed environment. Enclosures shall be steel. Hardware shall be plated or otherwise protected to resist corrosion. Joints shall be one-bolt type with through-bolts, which can be checked for tightness without de-energizing system. Maximum hot spot temperature rise at any point in busway at continuous rated load shall not exceed 55 degrees C above maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C in any position. Provide internal barriers to prevent movement of superheated gases. Contractor shall coordinate proper voltage phasing of entire bus duct system, for example where busway interfaces with transformers, switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, and other system components.

2.4.1 Feeder Busways Provide ventilated, except that vertical busways within 6 feet of floors shall be unventilated, low-impedance busway. Bus bars shall be fully covered with insulating material, except at stabs. Entire busway system shall be polarized.

2.4.2 Plug-In Busways Unventilated type. Plug-in units shall be circuit breaker-type or handle-operated, switch type, equipped with high interrupting-capacity, current-limiting fuses as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Bus bars shall be covered with insulating material throughout, except at joints and other


connection points. A hook stick of suitable length shall be provided for operating plug-in units from the floor.

2.5 CABLE TRAYS NEMA VE 1. Cable trays shall form a wireway system, and shall be of nominal depth as indicated. Cable trays shall be constructed of steel that has been zinc-coated after fabrication. Trays shall include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware. Edges, fittings, and hardware shall be finished free from burrs and sharp edges. Fittings shall have not less than load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and shall have manufacturer's minimum standard radius. Radius of bends shall be as indicated.

2.5.1 Trough-Type Cable Trays Provide width as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.5.2 Ladder-Type Cable Trays Provide with width and rung spacing as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.5.3 Channel-Type Cable Trays Provide with width as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Trays shall be one-piece construction having slots spaced not more than 4 1/2 inches on centers.

2.5.4 Cantilever Cantilever-type, center-hung cable trays may be provided at the Contractor's option in lieu of other cable tray types specified.

2.6 OPEN TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SUPPORT 2.6.1 Open Top Cable Supports Provide open top cable supports in accordance with UL 2043. Open top cable supports shall be as indicated.

2.6.2 Closed Ring Cable Supports Provide closed ring cable supports in accordance with UL 2043. Closed ring cable supports shall be as indicated.

2.7 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if nonmetallic.

2.7.1 Floor Outlet Boxes Boxes shall be adjustable and concrete tight. Each outlet shall consist of nonmetallic or cast-metal body with threaded openings for conduits, adjustable ring, and cover plate with threaded plug as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Telecommunications outlets shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Receptacle outlets shall be as stated in the


Delivery or Task Order and as specified herein. Provide gaskets where necessary to ensure watertight installation.

2.7.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System Provide standard type 4 11/16 inches square. Outlet boxes for wall-mounted telecommunications outlets shall be 4 by 2 1/8. Depth of boxes shall be large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend radii.

2.8 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet steel.

2.9 WIRES AND CABLES Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used.

2.9.1 Conductors Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid, except that conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3, shall be stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise. All conductors shall be copper.

2.9.1.1 Aluminum Conductors Aluminum conductors shall not be used.

2.9.1.2 Minimum Conductor Sizes Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG; for Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG; and for Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 22 AWG.

2.9.2 Color Coding Provide for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems shall be as follows:

a. 208/120 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue


b. 480/277 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - brown

(2) Phase B - orange

(3) Phase C - yellow

c. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red

2.9.3 Insulation Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, power and lighting wires shall be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83 or Type RHW conforming to UL 44, except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.

2.9.4 Bonding Conductors ASTM B 1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B 8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter.

2.9.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The TBB shall be a minimum No. 6 AWG and be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG.

2.9.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical service ground in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The bonding conductor for telecommunications shall be sized the same as the TBB.

2.9.5 Service Entrance Cables Service Entrance (SE) and Underground Service Entrance (USE) Cables, UL 854.

2.9.6 Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable UL 719, Type NM or NMC.

2.9.7 Wire and Cable for 400 Hertz (Hz) Circuits Insulated copper conductors.

2.9.8 Metal-Clad Cable UL 1569; NFPA 70, Type MC cable.


2.9.9 Armored Cable UL 4; NFPA 70, Type AC cable.

2.9.10 Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Cable UL listed; NFPA 70, Type MI cable. Sheathing containing asbestos fibers shall not be used.

2.9.11 Flat Conductor Cable UL listed; NFPA 70, Type FCC.

2.9.12 Cable Tray Cable or Power Limited Tray Cable UL listed; type TC or PLTC.

2.9.13 Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords UL 817.

2.10 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

2.11 DEVICE PLATES Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls shall be of zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges. For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be provided. Plates on finished walls shall be nylon or lexan, minimum 0.03 inch wall thickness. Plates shall be same color as receptacle or toggle switch with which they are mounted. Plates on finished walls shall be satin finish stainless steel or brushed-finish aluminum, minimum 0.03 inch thick. Screws shall be machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate. Sectional type device plates will not be permitted. Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."

2.12 SWITCHES 2.12.1 Toggle Switches NEMA WD 1, UL 20,type as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Handles shall be thermoplastic, color as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Wiring terminals shall be screw-type, side-wired or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium and contact arm shall be one-piece copper alloy. Switches shall be rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles indicated.


2.12.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle NEMA WD 1. Provide pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part of the switch's handle. The pilot light shall be red and shall illuminate whenever the switch is closed or "on". The pilot lighted switch shall be rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated. Provide the circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.

2.12.3 Breakers Used as Switches For 120- and 277-Volt fluorescent fixtures, mark breakers "SWD" in accordance with UL 489.

2.12.4 Disconnect Switches NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches. Fused switches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses, unless indicated otherwise. Switches serving as motor-disconnect means shall be horsepower rated. Provide switches in NEMA 1 or 3R enclosure as indicated, per NEMA ICS 6.

2.13 FUSES NEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch, panel and control center. Time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers or other circuit protective devices shall be coordinated for proper operation. Submit coordination data for approval. Fuses shall have voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.

2.13.1 Fuseholders Provide in accordance with UL 512.

2.13.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R) UL 198M, Class RK-1, RK-5, time-delay type as indicated. Associated fuseholders shall be Class R only.

2.13.3 Cartridge Fuses, High-Interrupting Capacity, Current Limiting Type (Classes J, L, and CC) UL 198M, Class J for zero to 600 amperes, Class L for 601 to 6,000 amperes, and Class CC for zero to 30 amperes.

2.13.4 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class T) UL 198M, Class T for zero to 1,200 amperes, 300 volts; and zero to 800 amperes, 600 volts.

2.14 RECEPTACLES UL 498, heavy-duty, grounding-type. Hospital grade where stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Ratings and configurations shall be as indicated. Bodies shall be color as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, per NEMA WD 1. Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting


strap. Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD 6. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement. Connect grounding pole to mounting strap. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.

2.14.1 Switched Duplex Receptacles Provide separate terminals for each ungrounded pole. Top receptacle shall be switched when installed.

2.14.2 Weatherproof Receptacles Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof, cast-metal cover plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide caps with a spring-hinged flap. Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in "wet locations with plug in use."

2.14.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Device shall be capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.

2.14.4 Special Purpose Receptacles Provide special purpose receptacles in ratings indicated.

2.14.5 Plugs Provide heavy-duty, rubber-covered multi-wire cord of required size, install plugs thereon, and attach to equipment. Plugs shall be UL listed with receptacles, complete with grounding blades. Where equipment is not available, turn over plugs and cord assemblies to the Government.

2.14.6 Range Receptacles NEMA 14-50 configuration, flush mounted for housing units, rated 50 amperes, 125/250 volts. Furnish one matching plug with receptacle.

2.14.7 Dryer Receptacles NEMA 14-30 configuration, rated 30 amperes, 125/250 volts. Furnish one matching plug with each receptacle.

2.14.8 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles Provide duplex receptacle with mechanical sliding shutters that prevent the insertion of small objects into its contact slots.

2.15 PANELBOARDS UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated, 10,000 amperes symmetrical minimum. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit breaker-equipped unless indicated otherwise. Design shall be such that


individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings. Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise. Main breaker shall be "separately" mounted "above" or "below" branch breakers. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers. Directories shall indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard. Directories shall also indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP). Provide new directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering. Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use. Panelboard shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.

2.15.1 Enclosure Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50. All cabinets shall be fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No. 10 gauge if flush-mounted or mounted outdoors, and not less than No. 12 gauge if surface-mounted indoors, with full seam-welded box ends. Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Cabinets shall be painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING. Outdoor cabinets shall be of NEMA 3R raintight with conduit hubs welded to the cabinet or with a removable steel plate 1/4 inch thick in the bottom for field drilling for conduit connections. Front edges of cabinets shall be form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front. All cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet shall deviate from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch. Holes shall be provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface. Flush doors shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed. Each door shall be fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long shall be provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock. Two keys shall be provided with each lock, and all locks shall be keyed alike. Finished-head cap screws shall be provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.

2.15.2 Panelboard Buses Panelboards shall have copper buses. Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet. In addition to equipment grounding bus, provide second "isolated" ground bus, where indicated.

2.15.2.1 Panelboard Neutrals for Non-Linear Loads UL listed, and panelboard type shall have been specifically UL heat rise tested for use on non-linear loads. Panelboard shall be heat rise tested in accordance with UL 67, except with the neutral assembly installed and


carrying 200 percent of the phase bus current during testing. Verification of the testing procedure shall be provided upon request. Two neutral assemblies paralleled together with cable is not acceptable. Nameplates for panelboard rated for use on non-linear loads shall be marked "SUITABLE FOR NON-LINEAR LOADS"and shall be in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Provide a neutral label with instructions for wiring the neutral of panelboards rated for use on non-linear loads.

2.15.3 Circuit Breakers UL 489, thermal magnetic-type or solid state-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker shall be mounted. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Where indicated on the drawings, provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices. All main, feeder, and branch circuit breakers shall be bolted to the buss. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.15.3.1 Multipole Breakers Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.

2.15.3.2 Circuit Breaker With GFCI UL 943 and NFPA 70. Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices, for personnel protection, and 20 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class B GFCI per equipment protection.

2.15.3.3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.

2.15.3.4 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters UL 489, UL 1699 and NFPA 70. Molded case circuit breaker shall be rated as indicated. Two pole arc-fault circuit-interrupters shall be rated 120/240 volts. The provision of (two) one pole circuit breakers for shared neutral circuits in lieu of (one) two pole circuit breaker is unacceptable. Provide with "push-to-test" button.

2.15.4 Fusible Switches for Panelboards NEMA KS 1, hinged door-type. Switches serving as motor disconnect means shall be horsepower rated.

2.15.5 400 Hz Panelboard and Breakers Panelboards and breakers for use on 400 Hz systems shall be "400 Hz" rated and labeled.


2.16 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as indicated.

2.17 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP) 2.17.1 General Motor short-circuit protectors shall conform to UL 508 and UL 489 and shall be provided as shown. Protectors shall be used only as part of a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection, and shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

2.17.2 Construction Motor short-circuit protector bodies shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long life, non-hygroscopic materials. Protectors shall fit special MSCP mounting clips and shall not be interchangeable with any commercially available fuses. Protectors shall have 100 percent one-way interchangeability within the A-Y letter designations. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

2.17.3 Ratings Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. Letter designations shall be A through Y for motor controller Sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, with 100,000 amperes interrupting capacity rating. Letter designations shall correspond to controller sizes as follows:

CONTROLLER SIZE MSCP DESIGNATION NEMA 0 A-N NEMA 1 A-P NEMA 2 A-S NEMA 3 A-U NEMA 4 A-W NEMA 5 A-Y 2.18 TRANSFORMERS NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, ventilated, with copper windings. Provide transformers in NEMA 1 or 3R enclosure as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Transformer shall have 220 degrees C insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, and shall have 180 degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less, with temperature rise not exceeding 150 degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C. Transformer of 150 degrees C temperature rise shall be capable of carrying continuously 100 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating. Transformers shall be quiet type with maximum sound


level at least 3 decibels less than NEMA standard level for transformer ratings indicated

2.18.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency Transformers, indicated and specified with: 480V primary, 80 degrees C or 115 degrees C temperature rise, kVA ratings of 37.5 to 100 for single phase or 30 to 500 for three phase, shall be energy efficient type. Minimum efficiency, based on factory test results, shall not be less than NEMA Class 1 efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1.

2.18.2 Transformers With Non-Linear Loads Transformer insulation shall be a UL recognized 220 degrees C system. Neither the primary nor the secondary temperature shall exceed 220 degrees C at any point in the coils while carrying their full rating of non-sinusoidal load. Transformers are to be UL listed and labeled for K-Factor rating as indicated in accordance with UL 1561. Transformers evaluated by the UL K-Factor evaluation shall be listed for 80 degrees C average temperature rise only. Transformers with K-Factor ratings with temperature rise of 150 degrees C rise shall not be acceptable. K-Factor rated transformers shall have an impedance range of 3 percent to 5 percent, and shall have a minimum reactance of 2 percent to prevent excessive neutral current when supplying loads with large amounts of third harmonic.

2.19 MOTORS NEMA MG 1, except fire pump motors shall be as specified in Section 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS; hermetic-type sealed motor compressors shall also comply with UL 984. Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load current, or a combination of these characteristics, and other characteristics, of each motor as indicated or specified. Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters. Motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 460 volts. Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating. Unless otherwise indicated, motors rated 1 HP and above shall be continuous duty type and shall be provided with a NEMA rated standard magnetic starter. Do not provide magnetic starters based on IEC ratings.

Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated.

2.19.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.19.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors


Polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. In addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors shall meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.19.3 Motor Sizes Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make adjustments to wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.

2.19.4 Wiring and Conduit Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment, and motor control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies, the conduit and wiring connecting such centers, assemblies, or other power sources to equipment as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring shall be provided under, and conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment.

2.20 MOTOR CONTROLLERS UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2, except fire pump controllers shall be as specified in Section 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS. Controllers shall have thermal overload protection in each phase and shall have one spare normally open and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay. Magnetic-type motor controllers shall have undervoltage protection when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall have undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton stations or switches. When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, controller shall have hand/off/automatic selector switch. Connections to selector switch shall be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand" position. Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions. Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram. Selector switch shall have means for locking in any position. For each motor not in sight of controller or where controller disconnecting means is not in sight of motor location and driven machinery location, controller


disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in open position. As an alternative, provide a manually operated, lockable, nonfused switch which disconnects motor from supply source within sight of motor. Overload protective devices shall provide adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in "off" position. Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller shall be in rms symmetrical amperes as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Provide controllers in hazardous locations with classifications as indicated.

2.20.1 Control Wiring All control wire shall be stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with 600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type MTW meeting UL 1063, and shall pass the VW-1 flame tests included in those standards. Hinge wire shall have Class K stranding. Current transformer secondary leads shall be not smaller than No. 10 AWG. The minimum size of control wire shall be No. 14 AWG. Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below shall be of the same type as control wiring and the minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG. Special attention shall be given to wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal points.

2.20.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks NEMA ICS 4. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring shall be molded or fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts. The terminals shall be removable binding, fillister or washer head screw type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts. The terminals shall be not less than No. 10 in size and shall have sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors to each terminal. The terminal arrangement shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer and not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent, whichever is greater, shall be provided on each block or group of blocks. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks will be acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type. The Contractor shall submit data showing that the proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying capacity, and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying parts.

2.20.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks

a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks shall be furnished for all current transformer secondary leads and shall have provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks shall meet the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above.

b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and

of adequate capacity shall be provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except those for feeder tap units. The terminals shall be of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the


removable screw type, having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated more than 50 amperes, screws shall have hexagonal heads. Conducting parts between connected terminals shall have adequate contact surface and cross-section to operate without overheating. Each connected terminal shall have the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color.

2.20.3 Control Circuits Control circuits shall have maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from a separate control source or a control transformer in same enclosure as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Transformers shall conform to UL 506, as applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits, shall have primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary side. One secondary lead shall be fused; other shall be grounded. For designated systems, as indicated, provide backup power supply, including transformers connected to emergency or standby power source. Provide for automatic switchover and alarm upon failure of primary control circuit.

2.20.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers NEMA ICS 6.

2.20.5 Multiple-Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor Controllers Across-the-line-type, electrically and mechanically interlocked. Multiple-speed controllers shall have compelling relays and shall be multiple-button, station-type with pilot lights for each speed.

2.20.6 Pushbutton Stations Provide with "start/stop" momentary contacts having one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts, and red lights to indicate when motor is running. Stations shall be heavy duty, oil-tight design.

2.20.7 Pilot and Indicating Lights Provide LED cluster lamps.

2.20.8 Reduced-Voltage Controllers Provide for polyphase motors 2 horsepower and larger. Reduced-voltage starters shall be single-step, closed transition autotransformer, solid state-type, or as indicated, and shall have adjustable time interval between application of reduced and full voltages to motors.

2.21 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES) Number of poles and mounting type as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, with overload protection. Provide with pilot light where stated in the Delivery or Task Order.


2.21.1 Pilot Lights Provide yoke-mounted, seven element LED cluster light module. Color shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.

2.22 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS UL 845, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 3. Wiring Class, NEMA enclosure type,voltage, phase, and minimum short-circuit withstand and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Incoming power feeder entrance location and termination on main lugs or main protective device as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Arrange busing so that control center can be expanded from one or both ends as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Interconnecting wires shall be copper. Terminal blocks shall be plug-in-type so that controllers may be removed without disconnecting individual control wiring.

2.22.1 Bus Systems Power bus shall be braced to withstand fault current in amperes rms symmetrical as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Wiring troughs shall be isolated from horizontal and vertical bus bars.

2.22.1.1 Horizontal and Main Buses Horizontal bus shall have continuous current rating in amperes as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Main bus shall be copper, silver-plated enclosed in isolated compartment at top of each vertical section. Main bus shall be isolated from wire troughs, starters, and other areas.

2.22.1.2 Vertical Bus Vertical bus shall have continuous current rating in amperes as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, and shall be copper, silver-plated. Vertical bus shall be enclosed in flame-retardant, polyester glass "sandwich."

2.22.1.3 Ground Bus Copper ground bus shall be provided full width of motor control center and shall be equipped with necessary lugs.

2.22.1.4 Neutral Bus Insulated neutral bus shall be provided continuous through the motor control center; neutral shall be fully rated. Lugs of appropriate capacity shall be provided, as required.

2.22.2 Motor Disconnecting Devices and Controllers Shall comply with paragraph COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS.

2.22.3 Combination Motor Controllers UL 508 and other requirements in paragraph, MOTOR CONTROLLERS. Controller shall employ molded case circuit breaker or fusible switch with clips for fuses as stated in the Delivery or Task Order for branch circuit protection. Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller shall


be in rms symmetrical amperes as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Circuit breakers for combination controllers shall be thermal magnetic or magnetic only as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.22.4 Space Heaters Space heaters shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and shall be controlled using an adjustable 10 to 35 degrees C (50 to 90 degree F) thermostat, magnetic contactor, and a molded-case circuit breaker. The space heaters shall be strip elements, ratings as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. The contactors shall be open type, electrically-held, rated 30 amperes, 2-pole, with 120-volt ac coils.

2.23 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 23, "Mechanical."

2.24 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires, wireways, cable trays, and other accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as specified herein. Provide a minimum 1 inch conduit to telecommunications outlet boxes. Additional telecommunications requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

2.25 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM 2.25.1 CATV Outlets Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlet rated from 5 to 1000 MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes with isolation barrier with mounting frame.

2.25.2 CATV Faceplates Provide modular faceplates for mounting of CATV Outlets. Faceplate shall include designation labels and label covers for circuit identification. Faceplate color shall match outlet and switch coverplates.

2.25.3 Backboards Coordinate CATV backboard requirements with telecommunications backboard requirements as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING.

2.26 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT 2.26.1 Ground Rods UL 467. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of 3/4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet.


2.26.2 Ground Bus A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated.

2.26.3 Telecommunications Grounding Busbar Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor installation in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Busbars shall be cleaned prior to fastening the conductors to the busbar, and an anti-oxidant shall be applied to the contact area to control corrosion and reduce contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility and a (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) shall be sized in accordance with the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:

a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard

sized lugs,

b. Minimum dimensions of 0.25 in thick x 4 in wide for the TMGB and 2 in wide for TGBs with length as indicated;

c. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2.27 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS Electrical materials, equipment, and devices for installation in hazardous locations, as defined by NFPA 70, shall be specifically approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Boundaries and classifications of hazardous locations shall be as indicated. Equipment in hazardous locations shall comply with UL 877 for circuit breakers, UL 886 for outlet boxes and fittings, UL 1010 for receptacles, UL 674 for motors, and UL 698 for industrial controls.

2.28 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.29 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Provide red laminated plastic label with white center core where indicated. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.


2.30 WARNING SIGNS Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer. The marking shall be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.

2.31 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

2.32 WIREWAYS UL 870. Material shall be steel epoxy painted, galvanized 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches. Provide in length required for the application with hinged- or screw-cover as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, NEMA 1, 12, or 3R enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.

2.33 METERING NEMA C12.1. Provide a self-contained, socket-mounted, electronic programmable outdoor watthour meter. Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field. Turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Meter shall be coordinated to system requirements.

a. Design: Provide watthour meter designed for use on a single-phase,

three-wire, 240/120 or 480/240 volt system, or three-phase three-wire delta or four-wire wye 208 to 600V system. Digital output shall be Modbus RTU/RS485 for non-Lon Works meter applications, or ANSI/CEA-709.1b protocol (LonTalk) output for communications using Standard Network Variable Types (SNVT) for measured values for Lon Works meter applications.

b. Class: As required, accuracy: +/- 0.5 percent at unity power

factor, +/- 1.0 percent at 0.5 power factor; Finish: Class II.

c. Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and unauthorized removal.

d. Kilowatt-hour Register: five digit electronic programmable type.

e. Demand Register:

(1) Provide solid state.

(2) Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter face.


(3) Demand interval length: Shall be programmed for 15 minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

f. Socket: ANSI C12.7. Provide NEMA Type 3R, box-mounted socket,

ringless, having manual circuit-closing bypass and having jaws compatible with requirements of the meter. Provide manufacturers standard enclosure color unless otherwise indicated.

g. Quantities Measured:

(1) Power (kW), average demand over 15 minute intervals.

(2) Energy.

(3) Power Factor.

(4) True Power.

h. Operating Conditions:

(1) Temperature: -20 degrees C to + 60 degrees C.

(2) Humidity: 5 percent to 90 percent RH (non-condensing).

(3) Frequency: 60 Hertz +/- 5 percent.

i. Additional Features:

(1) On-board data storage: Minimum 4 channels for 30 days.

(2) Alarm capabilities: Phase voltage over/under, phase loss, outage.

(3) Real time measurement of peak recording.

(4) Battery backup.

(5) Moisture proof enclosure (for exterior mounting).

2.34 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Provide parallel type surge protective devices which comply with UL 1449 as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Fuses shall not be used as surge suppression.

2.35 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting. Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections. Interior surfaces shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces shall be primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats


baked enamel with semigloss finish. Equipment located indoors shall be ANSI Light Gray. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.

2.36 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2.36.1 Transformer Factory Tests Submittal shall include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each transformer and also contain the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype" tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to those specified.

2.37 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION Analyses shall be prepared as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10, COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces, shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Underground Service Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.

3.1.2 Overhead Service Overhead service conductors into buildings shall terminate at service entrance fittings or weatherhead outside building. Overhead service conductors and support bracket for overhead conductors are included in Section 33 71 01, OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION.

3.1.3 Hazardous Locations Work in hazardous locations, as defined by NFPA 70, shall be performed in strict accordance with NFPA 70 for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Provide conduit and cable seals where required by NFPA 70. Conduit shall have tapered threads.

3.1.4 Service Entrance Identification Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures shall be labeled and identified as such.

3.1.4.1 Labels Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, each enclosure, new and existing, shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices. Label, at minimum, shall indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of


enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.

3.1.5 Wiring Methods Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for all circuits installed in conduit and raceways. Shared neutral, or multi-wire branch circuits, are not permitted with arc-fault circuit interrupters. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings shall be made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts. Metal conduit shall extend through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches. Conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.5.1 Pull Wire Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire shall be plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

3.1.5.2 Metal Clad Cable Install in accordance with NFPA 70, Type MC cable.

3.1.5.3 Armored Cable Install in accordance with NFPA 70, Type AC cable.

3.1.5.4 Flat Conductor Cable Install in accordance with NFPA 70, Type FCC cable.

3.1.6 Conduit Installation Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project.

3.1.6.1 Restrictions Applicable to Aluminum Conduit

a. Do not install underground or encase in concrete or masonry.

b. Do not use brass or bronze fittings.

c. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).


3.1.6.2 Restrictions Applicable to EMT

a. Do not install underground.

b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.

c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but

not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT.

d. Do not use in hazardous areas.

e. Do not use outdoors.

f. Do not use in fire pump rooms.

g. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the

effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP). 3.1.6.3 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit

a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80

(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile magazines, and other such areas.

(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas.

(3) Do not use in fire pump rooms.

(4) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or fire-rated floors.

(5) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.

(6) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

b. Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing

(1) Do not install underground.

(2) Do not encase in concrete except when provided with fittings identified for this purpose are used for connections.

(3) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile magazines, and other such areas.

(4) Do not use in hazardous areas.


(5) Do not use outdoors.

(6) Do not use in sizes larger than 2 inch.

(7) Do not run exposed in buildings exceeding three floors above grade, where "first floor" is as defined in NFPA 70.

(8) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

3.1.6.4 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

3.1.6.5 Service Entrance Conduit, Overhead Rigid steel or IMC from service entrance to service entrance fitting or weatherhead outside building.

3.1.6.6 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground PVC, Type-EPC 40, galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC. Underground portion shall be encased in minimum of 3 inches of concrete and shall be installed minimum 18 inches below slab or grade.

3.1.6.7 Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40; or fiberglass. Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through floor slab. Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6 inches above floor.

3.1.6.8 Conduit Interior to Buildings for 400 Hz Circuits Aluminum or nonmetallic. Where 400-Hz circuit runs underground or through concrete, conduit shall be PVC Schedule 40.

3.1.6.9 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts Rigid metal conduit or IMC only.

3.1.6.10 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs Conduit run under floor slab shall be located a minimum of 12 inches below the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.

3.1.6.11 Conduit Through Floor Slabs Where conduits rise through floor slabs, curved portion of bends shall not be visible above finished slab.

3.1.6.12 Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs Rigid steel or IMC unless indicated otherwise. Locate so as not to adversely affect structural strength of slabs. Install conduit within


middle one-third of concrete slab. Space conduits horizontally not closer than three diameters, except at cabinet locations. Curved portions of bends shall not be visible above finish slab. Increase slab thickness as necessary to provide minimum one inch cover over conduit. Where embedded conduits cross building and/or expansion joints, provide suitable watertight expansion/deflection fittings and bonding jumpers. Expansion/deflection fittings shall allow horizontal and vertical movement of raceway. Conduit larger than one inch trade size shall be parallel with or at right angles to main reinforcement; when at right angles to reinforcement, conduit shall be close to one of supports of slab.

3.1.6.13 Stub-Ups Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.

3.1.6.14 Conduit Support Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one-fourth proof test load. Fasteners attached to concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock-resistant. Holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Supporting means shall not be shared between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Installation shall be coordinated with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations. Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.6.15 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes,


fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions.

3.1.6.16 Locknuts and Bushings Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.

3.1.6.17 Flexible Connections Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be 1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit in wet and damp locations and in fire pump rooms for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

3.1.6.18 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A.

a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work area to the telecommunications room shall be installed and cabling length requirements in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Size conduits, wireways, and cable trays in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as indicated.

b. Backbone Pathway: Telecommunication pathways from the telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms, and, telecommunications equipment rooms (backbone cabling) shall be installed in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. Size conduits, wireways, and cable trays for telecommunications risers in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as indicated.

3.1.6.19 Community Antenna Television (CATV) System Conduits Install a system of CATV wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires, cable trays, and other accessories for CATV outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. Distribution system shall be star topology with empty conduit and pullwire from each outlet box to the telecommunications room and empty conduit and pullwire from each telecommunications room to the head end equipment location.

3.1.7 Busway Installation Installation shall comply at minimum with NFPA 70. Install busways parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support busways at 5 foot maximum intervals, and brace to prevent lateral movement. Hinges provided on risers shall be fixed type; spring-type are unacceptable. Provide flanges where busway makes penetrations through walls and floors, and seal to maintain smoke and fire ratings. Provide waterproof curb where


busway riser passes through floor. Seal gaps with fire-rated foam and calk. Provide expansion joints, but only where bus duct crosses building expansion joints. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.8 Cable Tray Installation Install and ground in accordance with NFPA 70. In addition, install and ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A, and TIA J-STD-607-A. Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support in accordance with manufacturer recommendations but at not more than 6 foot intervals. Adjacent cable tray sections shall be bonded together by connector plates of an identical type as the cable tray sections. For grounding of cable tray system provide No. 2 AWG bare copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section, except use No. 1/0 aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Terminate cable trays 10 inches from both sides of smoke and fire partitions. Conductors run through smoke and fire partitions shall be installed in 4 inch rigid steel conduits with grounding bushings, extending 12 inches beyond each side of partitions. Seal conduit on both ends to maintain smoke and fire ratings of partitions. Penetrations shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.9 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when installed in hazardous areas, and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel, except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit system. Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls shall be square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts or nail-type nylon anchors may be used in lieu of expansion shields or machine screws. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway


with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.

3.1.9.1 Boxes Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum 4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets shall be a minimum of 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep, except for wall mounted telephones and outlet boxes for handicap telephone stations. Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls.

3.1.9.2 Pull Boxes Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, and compatible with nonmetallic raceway systems, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

3.1.9.3 Extension Rings Extension rings are not permitted for new construction. Use only on existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish.

3.1.10 Mounting Heights Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches and handicapped telecommunications stations 48 inches above finished floor. Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Wall-mounted telecommunications outlets shall be mounted at height 60 inches above finished floor or as indicated. Mount other devices as indicated. Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets in non-hazardous areas to center of device or outlet. Measure mounting heights of receptacle outlet boxes in hazardous areas to the bottom of the outlet box.

3.1.11 Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable Installation Where possible, install cables concealed behind ceiling or wall finish. Thread cables through holes bored on approximate centerline of wood members; notching of end surfaces is not permitted. Provide sleeves through concrete or masonry for threading cables. Install exposed cables parallel to or at right angles to walls or structural members. Protect exposed nonmetallic sheathed cables less than 4 feet above floors from mechanical injury by installation in conduit or tubing. When cable is used in metal stud construction, insert plastic stud grommets in studs at each point through which cable passes, prior to installation of cable.

3.1.12 Mineral Insulated, Metal Sheathed (Type MI) Cable Installation


Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable system, Type MI, may be used in lieu of exposed conduit and wiring. Conductor sizes shall be not less than those indicated for the conduit installation. Cables shall be fastened within 12 inches of each turn or offset and at 33 inches maximum intervals. Make cable terminations in accordance with NFPA 70 and cable manufacturer's recommendations. Single-conductor cables of a circuit, having capacities of more than 50 amperes, shall terminate in a single box or cabinet opening. Individual conductors in all outlets and cabinets shall be color-coded.

3.1.13 Conductor Identification Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. Where several feeders pass through a common pull box, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation. Phase conductors of low voltage power circuits shall be identified by color coding. Phase identification by a particular color shall be maintained continuously for the length of a circuit, including junctions. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, color coding shall be by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, color coding shall be by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with Section 23 09 23, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. Provide telecommunications system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.

3.1.13.1 Marking Strips White or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, shall be provided for wire designations. The wire numbers shall be made with permanent ink. The marking strips shall be reversible to permit marking both sides, or two marking strips shall be furnished with each block. Marking strips shall accommodate the two sets of wire numbers. Each device to which a connection is made shall be assigned a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and each device terminal to which a connection is made shall be marked with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits shall be provided for the Government's wire designations. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of points required.

3.1.14 Splices Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation.

3.1.15 Covers and Device Plates


Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations.

3.1.16 Electrical Penetrations Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.17 Grounding and Bonding Provide in accordance with the contract drawings, the following specifications, NFPA 70 and NFPA 780 as applicable. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, access flooring support system, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential. This shall include lightning protection where required, electrical service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. Interconnection to the gas line shall be made on the customer's side of the meter. Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system as applicable. In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.

3.1.17.1 Ground Rods Provide cone pointed ground rods. The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Std 81. The maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers, or if sectional type rods are used, additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. In high-ground-resistance, UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add.

3.1.17.2 Grounding Connections Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, excepting specifically those connections for which access for periodic testing is required, by exothermic weld or compression connector.


a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to

provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.1.17.3 Ground Bus A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment shall be effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus. The ground bus shall be bonded to both the entrance ground, and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor. Connections and splices shall be of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except that pressure connectors or bolted connections shall be used for connections to removable equipment. For raised floor equipment rooms in computer and data processing centers, a minimum of 4, one at each corner, ground buses shall be provided and connected to the building grounding system. Connections shall be bolted type in lieu of thermoweld, so they can be changed as required by additions and/or alterations.

3.1.17.4 Resistance Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact Contracting Officer for further instructions.

3.1.17.5 Telecommunications System Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:

a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications

main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility. The TMGB shall be as close to the electrical service entrance grounding connection as practicable. Provide a telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. The TGB shall be as close to the telecommunications room panelboard as practicable, when equipped. Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is not installed in the telecommunications room, the TGB shall be located near the backbone cabling and associated terminations. In addition, the TGB shall be placed to provide for the shortest and straightest routing of the grounding conductors. Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located within the same room or space as a TGB, that panelboard’s alternating current equipment ground (ACEG) bus (when equipped) or the panelboard enclosure shall be bonded to the TGB. Telecommunications grounding busbars shall be installed to maintain clearances as required by NFPA 70 and shall be insulated from its support. A minimum of 2


inches separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and the mounting height shall be adjusted to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable routing.

b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main

telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 3 feet in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor, minimum. Provide a telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB), as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, that originates at the TMGB extends throughout the building using the telecommunications backbone pathways, and connects to the TGBs in all telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. The TBB conductors shall be installed and protected from physical and mechanical damage. The TBB conductors should be installed without splices and routed in the shortest possible straight-line path. The bonding conductor between a TBB and a TGB shall be continuous. Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be a minimum and they shall be accessible and located in telecommunications spaces. Joined segments of a TBB shall be connected using exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. All joints shall be adequately supported and protected from damage. Whenever two or more TBBs are used within a multistory building, the TBBs shall be bonded together with a grounding equalizer (GE) at the top floor and at a minimum of every third floor in between. The TBB and GE shall not be connected to the pathway ground, except at the TMGB or the TGB.

c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications

grounding connections to the TMGB or TGB shall utilize listed compression two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type connections. All metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or space as the TMGB or TGB shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB respectively. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within the room; each TMGB and TGB shall be bonded to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible, the metal frame shall be bonded to the TGB or TMGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. When practicable because of shorter distances and, where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building shall be listed for the intended purpose.

3.1.18 Equipment Connections Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically


noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section specifying the associated equipment.

3.1.19 Elevator Provide circuit to line terminals of elevator controller, and disconnect switch on line side of controller, outlet for control power, outlet receptacle and work light at mid-height of elevator shaft, and work light and outlet receptacle in elevator pit.

3.1.20 Government-Furnished Equipment Contractor shall rough-in for Government-furnished equipment or shall make connections to Government-furnished equipment as stated in the Delivery or Task Order to make equipment operate as intended, including providing miscellaneous items such as plugs, receptacles, wire, cable, conduit, flexible conduit, and outlet boxes or fittings.

3.1.21 Repair of Existing Work Repair of existing work, demolition, and modification of existing electrical distribution systems shall be performed as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

3.1.21.1 Workmanship Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping, and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.

3.1.21.2 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed Existing concealed wiring to be removed shall be disconnected from its source. Remove conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of floor, and through walls; and seal openings.

3.1.21.3 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment shall include equipment's associated wiring, including conductors, cables, exposed conduit, surface metal raceways, boxes, and fittings, as indicated.

3.1.21.4 Continuation of Service Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing circuits of equipment shall remain energized. Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall have circuits wiring and power restored back to original condition.

3.1.22 Watthour Meters NEMA C12.1.


3.1.23 Surge Protective Devices Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible.

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.

3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00, PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting Officer 10 working days notice prior to conducting tests.

3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.

3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum resistance shall be 250,000 ohms.

3.5.3 Transformer Tests Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm.

3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.

3.5.5 Grounding System Test


Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made.

3.5.6 Watthour Meter

a. Visual and mechanical inspection

(1) Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.

(2) Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meter.

(2) Calibrate watthour meters to one-half percent.

(3) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable.




SECTION 26 28 01.00 10

COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM D 2472 (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for

Sulphur Hexafluoride


Electrical Safety Code IEEE C37.04 (1999; Amendment A 2003; R 2006) Rating

Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis

IEEE C37.06 (2000) AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated

on a Symmetrical Current Basis - Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities

IEEE C37.13 (1990; R 1995) Standard for Low-Voltage AC

Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures IEEE C37.16 (2000) Recommendations for Low-Voltage Power

Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit Protectors, - Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application

IEEE C37.2 (1996; R 2001) Electrical Power System Device

Function Numbers and Contact Designations IEEE C37.20.1 (2002; Addenda A 2005; Addenda B 2006; R

2007) Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit-Breaker Switchgear

IEEE C37.46 (2000) For High Voltage Expulsion and

Current-Limiting Type Power Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches

IEEE C37.90 (2005) Standard for Relays and Relay Systems

Associated With Electric Power Apparatus IEEE C57.13 (2008) Standard Requirements for Instrument

Transformers


IEEE Std 242 (2001; Errata 2003) Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - Buff Book

IEEE Std 399 (1997) Recommended Practice for Power Systems

Analysis - Brown Book

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA AB 1 (2002) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded

Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures NEMA C12.11 (2007) Instrument Transformers for Revenue

Metering, 10 kV BIL through 350 kV BIL (0.6 kV NSV through 69 kV NSV)

NEMA C37.50 (1989; R 2000) Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit

Breakers Used in Enclosures - Test Procedures NEMA FU 1 (2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses





NEMA ICS 3 (2005) Standard for Industrial Control and

Systems: Medium Voltage Controllers Rated 2001 to 7200 Volts AC

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial

Controls and Systems Enclosures NEMA SG 4 (2000; R 2005) Alternating-Current High-

Voltage Circuit Breaker NEMA SG 6 (2000) Standard for Power Switching Equipment

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code -

2008 Edition

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 198M (2003; Rev thru Oct 2007) Mine-Duty Fuses

UL 486E (1994; Rev thru May 2000) Equipment Wiring

Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors


UL 489 (2002; Rev thru Jun 2006) Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 508 (1999; Rev thru Sep 2008) Standard for

Industrial Control Equipment UL 845 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2006) Standard for Motor

Control Centers UL 877 (1993; Rev thru Nov 1999) Circuit Breakers

and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Refer to Delivery or Task Order for the power system covered by this specification.


SD-03 Product Data

Fault Current Analysis Protective Device Coordination Study

The study along with protective device equipment submittals. No time extensions or similar contact modifications will be granted for work arising out of the requirements for this study. Approval of protective devices proposed will be based on recommendations of this study. The Government shall not be held responsible for any changes to equipment, device ratings, settings, or additional labor for installation of equipment or devices ordered and/or procured prior to approval of the study.

Equipment

Data consisting of manufacturer's time-current characteristic curves for individual protective devices, recommended settings of adjustable protective devices, and recommended ratings of non-adjustable protective devices.

System Coordinator

Verification of experience and license number, of a registered Professional Engineer with at least 3 years of current experience in the design of coordinated power system protection. Experience data shall include at least five references for work of a magnitude comparable to this contract, including points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers. This engineer must perform items required


by this section to be performed by a registered Professional Engineer.

Protective Relays

Data including calibration and testing procedures and instructions pertaining to the frequency of calibration, inspection, adjustment, cleaning, and lubrication.

Installation

Procedures including diagrams, instructions, and precautions required to properly install, adjust, calibrate, and test the devices and equipment.

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Testing

The proposed test plan, prior to field tests, consisting of complete field test procedure including tests to be performed, test equipment required, and tolerance limits, including complete testing and verification of the ground fault protection equipment, where used. Performance test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.

SD-07 Certificates

Devices and Equipment

Certificates certifying that all devices or equipment meet the requirements of the contract documents.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 System Coordinator System coordination, recommended ratings and settings of protective devices, and design analysis shall be accomplished by a registered professional electrical power engineer with a minimum of 3 years of current experience in the coordination of electrical power systems.

1.4.2 System Installer Calibration, testing, adjustment, and placing into service of the protective devices shall be accomplished by a manufacturer's product field service engineer or independent testing company with a minimum of two years of current product experience in protective devices.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Devices and equipment shall be visually inspected when received and prior to acceptance from conveyance. Protect stored items from the environment in


accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Damaged items shall be replaced.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS Devices and equipment furnished under this section shall be suitable for the site conditions. Seismic details shall conform to UFC 3-310-04 SEISMIC DESIGN FOR BUILDINGS and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT, 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT as indicated.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS One additional spare fuse or spare fuse element for each furnished fuse or fuse element shall be delivered to the Contracting officer when the electrical system is accepted. Two complete sets of all special tools required for maintenance shall be provided, complete with a suitable tool box. Special tools are those that only the manufacturer provides, for special purposes (to access compartments, or operate, adjust, or maintain special parts).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARD PRODUCT Provide protective devices and equipment which are the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory utility type use for at least two years prior to bid opening.

2.2 NAMEPLATES Provide nameplates to identify all protective devices and equipment. Nameplate information shall be in accordance with NEMA AB 1.

2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION Metallic materials shall be protected against corrosion. Ferrous metal hardware shall be zinc or chrome-plated.

2.4 MOTOR CONTROLS AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Motor controls and motor control centers shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 3 and NEMA ICS 6, and UL 508and UL 845.

2.4.1 Motor Starters Provide combination starters with circuit breakers, fusible switches, or switches equipped with high-interrupting-capacity current-limiting fuses as indicated.

2.4.2 Reduced-Voltage Starters


Provide reduced-voltage starters for polyphase motors as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Reduced-voltage starters shall be of the single-step autotransformer, reactor, or resistor type having an adjustable time interval between application of reduced and full voltages to the motors. Wye-delta reduced voltage starter or part winding increment starters having an adjustable time delay between application of voltage to first and second winding of motor, may be used in lieu of the reduced voltage starters specified above for starting of motor-generator sets, centrifugally operated equipment or reciprocating compressors provided with automatic unloaders.

2.4.3 Thermal-Overload Protection Each motor of 1/8 hp or larger shall be provided with thermal-overload protection. Polyphase motors shall have overload protection in each ungrounded conductor. The overload-protection device shall be provided either integral with the motor or controller, or shall be mounted in a separate enclosure. Unless otherwise specified, the protective device shall be of the manually reset type. Single or double pole tumbler switches specifically designed for alternating-current operation only may be used as manual controllers for single-phase motors having a current rating not in excess of 80 percent of the switch rating.

2.4.4 Low-Voltage Motor Overload Relays 2.4.4.1 General Thermal and magnetic current overload relays shall conform to NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. Overload protection shall be provided either integral with the motor or controller, and shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. Standard units shall be used for motor starting times up to 7 second. Slow units shall be used for motor starting times from 8 to 12 seconds. Quick trip units shall be used on hermetically sealed, submersible pumps, and similar motors.

2.4.4.2 Construction Manual reset type thermal relays shall be melting alloy or bimetallic construction. Automatic reset type relays shall be bimetallic construction. Magnetic current relays shall consist of a contact mechanism and a dash pot mounted on a common frame.

2.4.4.3 Ratings Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. Trip current ratings shall be established by selection of the replaceable overload device and shall not be adjustable. Where the controller is remotely-located or difficult to reach, an automatic reset, non-compensated overload relay shall be provided. Manual reset overload relays shall be provided otherwise, and at all locations where automatic starting is provided. Where the motor is located in a constant ambient temperature, and the thermal device is located in an ambient temperature that regularly varies by more than 14 degrees F, an ambient temperature-compensated overload relay shall be provided.

2.4.5 Automatic Control Devices


2.4.5.1 Direct Control Automatic control devices (such as thermostats, float or pressure switches) which control the starting and stopping of motors directly shall be designed for that purpose and have an adequate horsepower rating.

2.4.5.2 Pilot-Relay Control Where the automatic-control device does not have such a rating, a magnetic starter shall be used, with the automatic-control device actuating the pilot-control circuit.

2.4.5.3 Manual/Automatic Selection

a. Where combination manual and automatic control is specified and the automatic-control device actuates the pilot control circuit of a magnetic starter, the magnetic starter shall be provided with a three-position selector switch marked MANUAL-OFF-AUTOMATIC.

b. Connections to the selector switch shall only allow the normal automatic regulatory control devices to be bypassed when the switch is in the Manual position; all safety control devices, such as low-or high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor-control circuit in both the Manual and the Automatic positions of the selector switch. Control circuit connections to any MANUAL-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance with wiring diagram approved by the contracting Officer unless such diagram is included on the drawings. All controls shall be 120 volts or less unless otherwise indicated.

2.4.6 Motor Control Centers Control centers shall be indoor type and shall contain combination starters and other equipment as indicated. Control centers shall be NEMA ICS 2, Class and Type as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Each control center shall be mounted on floor sills or mounting channels. Each circuit shall have a suitable metal or laminated plastic nameplate with white cut letters. Motor control centers shall be provided with a full-length ground bus bar.

2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE FUSES 2.5.1 General Low-voltage fuses shall conform to NEMA FU 1. Time delay and nontime delay options shall be as shown. Equipment provided under this contract shall be provided with a complete set of properly rated fuses when the equipment manufacturer utilizes fuses in the manufacture of the equipment, or if current-limiting fuses are required to be installed to limit the ampere-interrupting capacity of circuit breakers or equipment to less than the maximum available fault current at the location of the equipment to be installed. Fuses shall have a voltage rating of not less than the phase-to-phase circuit voltage, and shall have the time-current characteristics requires for effective power system coordination.

2.5.2 Cartridge Fuses; Noncurrent-Limiting Type


Cartridge fuses of the noncurrent-limiting type shall be Class H, nonrenewable, dual element, time lag type and shall have interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes. Class H Fuses shall conform to UL 198M. At 500 percent current, cartridge fuses shall not blow in less than 10 seconds. Cartridge fuses shall be used for circuits rated in excess of 30 amperes, 125 volts, except where current-limiting fuses are indicated.

2.5.3 Cartridge Fuses; Current-Limiting Type Cartridge fuses, current-limiting type, Class as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, shall have tested interrupting capacity not less than 100,000 amperes. Fuse holders shall be the type that will reject Class H fuses.

a. Class G, J, L and CC fuses shall conform to UL 198M.

b. Class K fuses shall conform to UL 198M.

c. Class R fuses shall conform to UL 198M.

d. Class T fuses shall conform to UL 198M.

2.5.3.1 Continuous Current Ratings (600 amperes and smaller) Service entrance and feeder circuit fuses (600 amperes and smaller) shall be Class RK1, RK5, or J, current-limiting, nontime-delay or time-delay as stated in the Delivery or Task Order with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity.

2.5.3.2 Continuous Current Ratings (greater than 600 amperes) Service entrance and feeder circuit fuses (greater than 600 amperes) shall be Class L, current-limiting, nontime-delay or time-delay as stated in the Delivery or Task Order with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity.

2.5.3.3 Motor and Transformer Circuit Fuses Motor, motor controller, transformer, and inductive circuit fuses shall be Class RK1 or RK5, current-limiting, time-delay with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity.

2.6 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE AND HIGH-VOLTAGE FUSES 2.6.1 General Medium-voltage and high-voltage fuses shall be distribution fuse cutouts or power fuses, E-rated, C-rated, or R-rated current-limiting fuses as shown.

2.6.2 Construction Units shall be suitable for the environment. Fuses shall have integral blown-fuse indicators. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

2.6.3 Ratings Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. Continuous-current ratings shall be as shown.


2.6.3.1 Fuse Cutouts Medium-voltage fuses and cutouts shall be of the ratings and types indicated. Open-link cutouts are not acceptable. Fuses shall be either indicating or dropout type. Fuse ratings shall be as indicated. Fuses cutouts shall be equipped with mounting brackets suitable for the indicated installations.

2.6.3.2 Power Fuses Expulsion-type and Current-limiting power fuses shall have ratings in accordance with IEEE C37.46 and as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.6.3.3 E-Rated, Current-Limiting Power Fuses E-rated, current-limiting, power fuses shall conform to IEEE C37.46.

2.6.3.4 C-Rated, Current-Limiting Fuses C-rated, current-limiting, power fuses shall open in 1000 seconds at currents between 170 and 240 percent of the C rating.

2.6.3.5 R-Rated, Current-Limiting Fuses R-rated, current-limiting, fuses shall be used with medium-voltage motor controllers only. R-rated fuses shall conform to IEEE C37.46.

2.7 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP) 2.7.1 General Motor short-circuit protectors shall conform to UL 508 and UL 489 and shall be provided as shown. Protectors shall be used only as part of a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection, and shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

2.7.2 Construction Motor short-circuit protector bodies shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long life, nonhygroscopic materials. Protectors shall fit special MSCP mounting clips and shall not be interchangeable with any commercially available fuses. Protectors shall have 100 percent one-way interchangeability within the A-Y letter designations. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

2.7.3 Ratings Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. Letter designations shall be A through Y for motor controller Sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, with 100,000 amperes interrupting capacity rating. Letter designations shall correspond to controller sizes as follows:

CONTROLLER SIZE MSCP DESIGNATION NEMA 0 A-N


NEMA 1 A-P NEMA 2 A-S NEMA 3 A-U NEMA 4 A-W NEMA 5 A-Y 2.8 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.8.1 General Molded-case circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. Circuit breakers may be installed in panelboards, switchboards, enclosures, motor control centers, or combination motor controllers. Circuit breakers and circuit breaker enclosures located in hazardous (classified) areas shall conform to UL 877.

2.8.2 Construction Molded-case circuit breakers shall be assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of glass reinforced insulating material providing high dielectric strength. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Lugs shall be listed for copper conductors only in accordance with UL 486E. Single-pole circuit breakers shall be full module size with not more than one pole per module. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be of the common-trip type having a single operating handle such that an overload or short circuit on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously. Sizes of 100 amperes or less may consist of single-pole breakers permanently factory assembled into a multi-pole unit having an internal, mechanical, nontamperable common-trip mechanism and external handle ties. All circuit breakers shall have a quick-make, quick-break overcenter toggle-type mechanism, and the handle mechanism shall be trip-free to prevent holding the contacts closed against a short-circuit or sustained overload. All circuit breaker handles shall assume a position between "ON" and "OFF" when tripped automatically. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

2.8.3 Ratings Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the available short-circuit current at the line terminals of the circuit breaker and correspond to the UL listed integrated short-circuit current rating specified for the panelboards and switchboards. Molded-case circuit breakers shall have nominal voltage ratings, maximum continuous-current ratings, and maximum short-circuit interrupting ratings in accordance with NEMA AB 1. Ratings shall be coordinated with system X/R ratio.

2.8.4 Cascade System Ratings Circuit breakers used in series combinations shall not be used. All circuit breakers shall be fully rated.


2.8.5 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Elements Thermal magnetic circuit breakers shall be provided as shown. Automatic operation shall be obtained by means of thermal-magnetic tripping devices located in each pole providing inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit protection. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and accessible from the front of all circuit breakers on frame sizes above 150 amperes.

2.8.6 Solid-State Trip Elements Solid-state circuit breakers shall be provided as shown. All electronics shall be self-contained and require no external relaying, power supply, or accessories. Printed circuit cards shall be treated to resist moisture absorption, fungus growth, and signal leakage. All electronics shall be housed in an enclosure which provides protection against arcs, magnetic interference, dust, and other contaminants. Solid-state sensing shall measure true RMS current with error less than one percent on systems with distortions through the 13th harmonic. Peak or average actuating devices are not acceptable. Current sensors shall be toroidal construction, encased in a plastic housing filled with epoxy to protect against damage and moisture and shall be integrally mounted on the breaker. Where indicated on the drawings, circuit breaker frames shall be rated for 100 percent continuous duty. Circuit breakers shall have tripping features as shown on the drawings and as described below:

a. Long-time current pick-up, adjustable from 50 percent to 100 percent of continuous current rating.

b. Adjustable long-time delay.

c. Short-time current pick-up, adjustable from 1.5 to 9 times long-time current setting.

d. Adjustable short-time delay.

e. Short-time I square times t switch.

f. Instantaneous current pick-up, adjustable from 1.5 to 9 times long-time current setting.

g. Ground-fault pick-up, adjustable from 20 percent to 60 percent of sensor rating, but in no case greater than 1200 amperes. Sensing of ground-fault current at the main bonding jumper or ground strap shall not be permitted. Zone-selective interlocking shall be provided as shown.

h. Fixed or adjustable ground-fault delay as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

i. Ground-fault I square times t switch.

j. Overload, short-circuit and ground-fault trip indicators shall be provided as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.8.7 Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers


Current-limiting circuit breakers shall be provided as shown. Current-limiting circuit breakers shall limit the let-through I square times t to a value less than the I square times t of one-half cycle of the symmetrical short-circuit current waveform. On fault currents below the threshold of limitation, breakers shall provide conventional overload and short-circuit protection. Integrally-fused circuit breakers shall not be used.

2.8.8 SWD Circuit Breakers Circuit breakers rated 15 amperes or 20 amperes and intended to switch 277 volts or less fluorescent lighting loads shall be marked "SWD."

2.8.9 HACR Circuit Breakers Circuit breakers 60 amperes or below, 240 volts, 1-pole or 2-pole, intended to protect multi-motor and combination-load installations involved in heating, air conditioning, and refrigerating equipment shall be marked "Listed HACR Type."

2.8.10 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor circuit protectors shall conform to NEMA AB 1 and UL 489 and shall be provided as shown. MCPs shall consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor circuit overload and short-circuit protection. Motor Circuit Protectors shall be rated in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.9 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.9.1 Construction Low-voltage power circuit breakers shall conform to IEEE C37.13 and IEEE C37.16 and shall be three-pole, single-throw, stored energy, manually or electrically operated as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, with drawout mounting. Solid-state trip elements which require no external power connections shall be provided. Circuit breakers shall have an open/close contact position indicator, charged/discharged stored energy indicator, primary disconnect devices, and a mechanical interlock to prevent making or breaking contact of the primary disconnects when the circuit breaker is closed. Control voltage shall be as indicated. The circuit breaker enclosure shall be suitable for its intended location.

2.9.2 Ratings Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent continuous duty and shall have trip current ratings and frame sizes as shown. Nominal voltage ratings, maximum continuous-current ratings, and maximum short-circuit interrupting ratings shall be in accordance with IEEE C37.16. Tripping features shall be as follows:

a. Long-time current pick-up, adjustable from 50 percent to 100 percent of sensor current rating.

b. Adjustable long-time delay.


c. Short-time current pick-up, adjustable from 1.5 to 9 times long-time current setting.

d. Adjustable short-time delay.

e. Short-time I square times t switch.

f. Instantaneous current pick-up, adjustable from 1.5 to 9 times long-time current setting.

g. Ground-fault pick-up, adjustable from 20 percent to 60 percent of sensor rating, but in no case greater than 1200 amperes. Sensing of ground-fault current at the main bonding jumper or ground strap shall not be permitted. Zone-selective interlocking shall be provided as shown.

h. Fixed or adjustable ground-fault delay.

i. Ground-fault I square times t switch.

j. Overload, short-circuit and ground-fault trip indicators shall be provided as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.10 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS/INTERRUPTERS 2.10.1 Metal-Enclosed Type Circuit breakers shall be of the drawout type, in accordance with IEEE C37.20.1.

2.10.2 Metal-Clad Type Circuit breakers shall comply with IEEE C37.04 and shall consist of items listed for such units in NEMA SG 6.

2.10.3 SF6 Interrupters SF6 interrupters shall be of the puffer type where the movement of the contact plunger will initiate the puff of SF6 gas across the contact to extinguish the arc at zero gauge tank pressure (atmospheric pressure). The puff of SF6 must be sufficient to clear an arc for 15 kV or lower class equipment and remain operational without damage or requiring maintenance or repair except for gas leaks. Breakers shall be provided with a loss-of-pressure alarm remote as shown on the drawings. Before the pressure in the container drops below the point where the breaker or switch cannot open safely without damage, the breaker shall activate the loss-of-pressure alarm, open automatically, and remain in the locked open position until repaired. If located inside a structure, breakers shall be located in a closed room with access only from outside, and provided with direct outdoor ventilation and a sensor unit which activates a vent fan and an alarm when a SF6 leak had occurred. The alarm will automatically be silenced when the oxygen in the room is above 19.5 percent. The SF6 shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2472, except that the maximum dew point shall be minus 140 degrees F (corresponding to 11 ppm water by volume), with only 11 ppm water by volume, and the minimum purity shall be 99.9 percent by weight. Circuit breakers shall have provisions for maintenance slow closing of


contacts and have a readily accessible contact wear indicator. Tripping time shall not exceed five cycles.

2.10.4 Vacuum Interrupters Vacuum interrupters shall be hermetically-sealed in a high vacuum to protect contact from moisture and contamination. Circuit breakers shall have provisions for slow closing of contacts and have a readily contact wear indicator. Tripping time shall not exceed five cycles.

2.10.5 Ratings Main buses shall be three-phase with a continuous current rating in amperes rms as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. The neutral bus shall be rated in amperes, continuous, as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Switchgear ratings at 60 Hz shall be in accordance with IEEE C37.06 and as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.11 OIL CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR SUBSTATIONS Oil circuit breakers shall comply with IEEE C37.04 and NEMA SG 4 and shall be of the outdoor three-pole type, with single or multiple tanks and frame-mounted or floor-mounted on a common base in accordance with the manufacturer's standard design. Control voltage shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Ratings shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.11.1 Incoming Line Circuit Breakers for Substations Incoming line circuit breakers shall be coordinated with the requirements of the serving utility, and of the protected transformer, and shall include the following control and monitoring system items that shall be mounted in the instrument and relay cabinet.

a. An ammeter and an ammeter switch.

b. A circuit breaker control switch for local and remote control operation.

c. Three overcurrent relays, devices 50/51.

d. One residually-connected ground-overcurrent relay, device 50/51N.

e. Three directional overcurrent relays, device 67.

f. One ground-directional-overcurrent relay, device 67N.

g. Three transformer differential relays, device 87T and an auxiliary lockout relay, device 86T located in the associated metal-clad switchgear or instrument and relay cabinet.

h. Single or three phase secondary potential test blocks with associated test plug, quantity as shown.


i. Single or three phase secondary current test blocks with associated test plug for each current transformer circuit or each three-phase set of current transformers, as indicated.

2.11.2 Line Tie Circuit Breakers for Substations The line tie circuit breaker shall be rated as shown, and shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked with other high-voltage items of equipment as shown. The line tie circuit breaker shall be equipped with control and monitoring system items the same as described for the incoming line circuit breaker. The instrument and relay cabinet shall house the same equipment listed for the incoming line circuit breaker cabinet except as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. The cabinet shall also house three bus differential relays, device 87B, and an auxiliary lockout relay, device 86B.

2.12 SUBSTATION AND SWITCHGEAR PROTECTIVE RELAYS Microprocessor-based protective relays shall be as shown and shall be of a type specifically designed for use on power switchgear or associated electric power apparatus. Protective relays shall conform to IEEE C37.90. Relays and auxiliaries shall suitable for operation with the instrument transformer ratios and connections provided.

2.12.1 Construction Relays for installation in metal-clad switchgear shall be of the semi-flush, rectangular, back-connected, dustproof, switchboard type. Cases shall have a black finish and window-type removable covers capable of being sealed against tampering. Relays shall be of a type that can be withdrawn, through approved sliding contacts, from fronts of panels or doors without opening current transformer secondary circuits, disturbing external circuits, or requiring disconnection of any relay leads. Necessary test devices shall be incorporated within each relay and shall provide a means for testing either from an external source of electric power or from associated instrument transformers. Each relay shall be provided with an operation indicator and an external target reset device. Relays shall have necessary auxiliaries for proper operation. Relays and auxiliaries shall be suitable for operation with the instrument transformer ratios and connections provided.

2.12.2 Ratings Relays shall be the manufacturer's standard items of equipments with appropriate ranges for time dial, tap, and other settings. Relay device numbers shall correspond to the function names and descriptions of IEEE C37.2.

2.12.3 Overcurrent Relays Overcurrent relays shall be as follows:

a. Phase overcurrent relays for main and tie circuit breakers shall be single-phase, nondirectional, microprocessor-based type, time delay, device 51, current taps as indicated with characteristic curves as indicated.


b. Ground overcurrent relays for main circuit breakers shall be nondirectional, microprocessor-based type, time delay, device as indicted and with characteristic curves as indicated.

c. Ground overcurrent relays for tie circuit breakers shall be nondirectional, microprocessor-based type, time delay, device 51N, residually connected, with current taps and characteristic curves as indicated.

d. Phase overcurrent relays for feeder circuit breakers shall be single-phase, nondirectional, microprocessor-based type, device 50/51, with instantaneous-current pick-up range as indicated, with time-delay-current taps and characteristic curves as indicated.

e. Ground overcurrent relays for feeder circuit breakers shall be nondirectional, microprocessor-based type instantaneous, device and current pick-up range as indicated.

2.12.4 Directional Overcurrent Relays Directional overcurrent relays shall be as follows:

a. Directional phase overcurrent relays shall be single-phase, microprocessor-based type, with instantaneous units. Phase relays, device 67, shall have an instantaneous-current pick-up range as indicated, with time-delay-current taps and characteristic curves as indicated.

b. Directional ground overcurrent relays, device 67N, shall have an instantaneous-current pick-up range as indicated, with time-delay-current taps and characteristic curves as indicated.

2.12.5 Automatic Reclosing Relay Relay, device 79, shall be of the three-phase, four-reclosure type, providing immediate initial reclosure, and three time-delay reclosures. Adjustable time delays shall be 10 to 60 seconds for reset and 0 to 45 seconds for reclosing. Units shall have instantaneous trip lockout after any preset trip when closing in on a fault. Auxiliary devices shall provided for lockout when an associated circuit breaker is tripped after reclosures and automatically reset when an associated circuit breaker is not tripped after any reclosure.

2.12.6 Transformer Differential and Lockout Relays Differential relays, device 87T, shall be of the three-phase or the single-phase high-speed differential type suitable for the protection of two-winding transformers, and shall be provided with a harmonic-restraint feature. Lockout relay, device 86T, shall be of the type which, when used in conjunction with the 87T relay, trips and locks out the indicated circuit breakers.

2.12.7 Bus Differential and Lockout Relays Bus differential relay, device 87B, shall be of the three-phase or single-phase, high-speed impedance differential type suitable for protection of buses. Lockout relay, device 86B, shall be of a type which, when used in


conjunction with the 87B relay, trips and locks out the indicated circuit breaker.

2.13 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS 2.13.1 General Instrument transformers shall comply with NEMA C12.11 and IEEE C57.13. Instrument transformers shall be configured for mounting in/on the device to which they are applied. Polarity marks on instrument transformers shall be visually evident and shown on the drawings.

2.13.2 Current Transformers Unless otherwise indicated, bar, wound, or window-type transformers are acceptable; and except for window-type units installed over insulated buses, transformers shall have a BIL rating consistent with the rated BIL of the associated switchgear or electric power apparatus bushings, buses or conductors. Current transformers shall have the indicated ratios. The continuous thermal-current rating factor shall be not less than that stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Other thermal and mechanical ratings of current transformers and their primary leads shall be coordinated with the design of the circuit breaker and shall be not less than the momentary rating of the associated circuit breaker. Circuit protectors shall be provided across secondary leads of the current transformers to prevent the accidental open-circuiting of the transformers while energized. Each terminal of each current transformer shall be connected to a short-circuiting terminal block in the circuit interrupting mechanism cabinet, power transformer terminal cabinet, and in the associated instrument and relay cabinets.

2.13.2.1 For Oil Circuit Breakers Single-ratio or Multi-ratio bushing type current transformers shall be provided in circuit breaker bushing wells as indicated. Single-ratio units shall have a minimum metering accuracy class rating of 0.6B-0.5. Multi-ratio units shall have a minimum relaying accuracy voltage class as stated in the Delivery or Task Order for either a C or T classification.

2.13.2.2 For Power Transformers Single-ratio or Multi-ratio bushing type current transformers shall be provided internally around power transformer bushings as shown. Single-ratio units shall have a minimum metering accuracy class of 0.6B-0.5. Multi-ratio units shall have a minimum relaying accuracy voltage class of as stated in the Delivery or Task Order for either a C or T classification.

2.13.2.3 For Metal-Clad Switchgear Single-ratio units, used for metering and relaying, shall have a metering accuracy class rating as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Single-ratio units, used only for relaying, shall have a relaying accuracy class rating as stated in the Delivery or Task Order for either a C or T classification.

2.13.2.4 For kW Hour and Demand Metering (Low Voltage)


Current transformers shall conform to IEEE C57.13. Current transformers with a metering accuracy Class as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, with a minimum RF as stated in the Delivery or Task Order at 86 degrees F, with 600-volt insulation, and 10 kV BIL shall be provided. Provide butyl-molded, window-type current transformers mounted on the transformer low-voltage bushings or as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Route current transformer leads in a location as remote as possible from the power transformer secondary cables to permit current measurements to be taken with hook-on-ammeters.

2.13.2.5 Voltage Transformers Voltage transformers shall have indicated ratios. Units shall have an accuracy rating as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Voltage transformers shall be of the drawout type having current-limiting fuses in both primary and secondary circuits. Mechanical interlocks shall prevent removal of fuses, unless the associated voltage transformer is in a drawout position. Voltage transformer compartments shall have hinged doors.

2.14 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION Analyses shall be prepared to demonstrate that the equipment selected and system constructed meet the contract requirements for ratings, coordination, and protection. They shall include a load flow analysis, a fault current analysis, and a protective device coordination study. The studies shall be performed by a registered professional engineer with demonstrated experience in power system coordination in the last 3 years. Provide a list of references complete with points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers. The selection of the engineer is subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.

2.14.1 Scope of Analyses The fault current analysis, and protective device coordination study shall include systems as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.14.2 Determination of Facts The time-current characteristics, features, and nameplate data for each existing protective device shall be determined and documented. Coordinate with the Contracting Officer for fault current availability at the site.

2.14.3 Single Line Diagram Prepare a single line diagram to show the electrical system buses, devices, transformation points, and all sources of fault current (including generator and motor contributions). A fault-impedance diagram or a computer analysis diagram may be provided. Each bus, device or transformation point shall have a unique identifier. If a fault-impedance diagram is provided, impedance data shall be shown. Location of switches, breakers, and circuit interrupting devices shall be shown on the diagram together with available fault data, and the device interrupting rating.

2.14.4 Fault Current Analysis 2.14.4.1 Method


The fault current analysis shall be performed in accordance with methods described in IEEE Std 242, and IEEE Std 399.

2.14.4.2 Data Actual data shall be utilized in fault calculations. Bus characteristics and transformer impedance shall be those proposed. Data shall be documented in the report.

2.14.4.3 Fault Current Availability Balanced three-phase fault, bolted line-to-line fault, and line-to-ground fault current values shall be provided at each voltage transformation point and at each power distribution bus. The maximum and minimum values of fault available at each location shall be shown in tabular form on the diagram or in the report.

2.14.5 Coordination Study The study shall demonstrate that the maximum possible degree of selectivity has been obtained between devices specified, consistent with protection of equipment and conductors from damage from overloads and fault conditions. The study shall include a description of the coordination of the protective devices in this project. A written narrative shall be provided describing: which devices may operate in the event of a fault at each bus; the logic used to arrive at device ratings and settings; situations where system coordination is not achievable due to device limitations (an analysis of any device curves which overlap); coordination between upstream and downstream devices; and relay settings. Recommendations to improve or enhance system reliability, and detail where such changes would involve additions or modifications to the contract and cost damages (addition or reduction) shall be provided. Composite coordination plots shall be provided on log-log graph paper.

2.14.6 Study report

a. The report shall include a narrative describing: the analyses performed; the bases and methods used; and the desired method of coordinated protection of the power system.

b. The study shall include descriptive and technical data for existing devices and new protective devices proposed. The data shall include manufacturers published data, nameplate data, and definition of the fixed or adjustable features of the existing or new protective devices.

c. The report shall document utility data including system voltages, fault MVA, system X/R ratio, time-current characteristic curves, current transformer ratios, and relay device numbers and settings; and existing power system data including time-current characteristic curves and protective device ratings and settings.

d. The report shall contain fully coordinated composite time-current characteristics curves for each bus in the system, as required to ensure coordinated power system protection between protective devices or equipment. The report shall include recommended ratings and settings of all protective devices in tabulated form.


e. The report shall provide the calculation performed for the analyses, including computer analysis programs utilized. The name of the software package, developer, and version number shall be provided.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

3.2 INSTALLATION Install protective devices in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

3.3 FIELD TESTING 3.3.1 General Perform field testing in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer 21 days prior to conducting tests. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct field tests. Perform all tests and inspections recommended by the manufacturer unless specifically waived by the Contracting Officer. Maintain a written record of all tests which includes date, test performed, personnel involved, devices tested, serial number and name of test equipment, and test results.

3.3.2 Safety Provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves, protective barriers, and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the test vicinity. Replace any devices or equipment which are damaged due to improper test procedures or handling.

3.3.3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Circuit breakers shall be visually inspected, operated manually, and connections checked for tightness. Current ratings shall be verified and adjustable settings incorporated in accordance with the coordination study.

3.3.4 Power Circuit Breakers 3.3.4.1 General Visually inspect the circuit breaker and operate the circuit breaker manually; adjust and clean primary contacts in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions; check tolerances and clearances; check for proper lubrication; and ensure that all connections are tight. For electrically operated circuit breakers, verify operating voltages on closing and tripping coils. Verify fuse ratings in control circuits; electrically operate the breaker, where applicable; and implement settings in accordance with the coordination study.

3.3.4.2 Power Circuit Breaker Tests


The following power circuit breakers shall be tested in accordance with NEMA C37.50.

3.3.5 Protective Relays Protective relays shall be visually and mechanically inspected, adjusted, tested, and calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Tests shall include pick-up, timing, contact action, restraint, and other aspects necessary to ensure proper calibration and operation. Relay settings shall be implemented in accordance with the coordination study. Relay contacts shall be manually or electrically operated to verify that the proper breakers and alarms initiate. Relaying current transformers shall be field tested in accordance with IEEE C57.13.




SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002) IEEE Guide on the Surges Environment

in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) IEEE Recommended Practice on

Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE Std 519 (1992; Errata 2004) Recommended Practices and

Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems



(1000 Volts Maximum) NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for


NEMA ICS 3.1 (1997; R 2003) Industrial Control and

Systems: Handling, Storage and Installation Guide for AC General-Purpose Medium Voltage Contactors and Class E Controllers, 50 and 60 Hertz


Controls and Systems Enclosures NEMA ICS 7 (2006) Industrial Control and Systems:

Adjustable-Speed Drives


2008 Edition

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)


MIL-STD-461 (Rev F) Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment


47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices


UL 489 (2002; Rev thru Jun 2006) Standard for


UL 508C (2002; Rev thru Feb 2008) Power Conversion

Equipment 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, and Section 26 20 00 DISTRIBUTION WIRING SYSTEM apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.3.1 Performance Requirements 1.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression Computing devices, as defined by 47 CFR 15, MIL-STD-461 rules and regulations, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in part 15.

1.3.1.2 Electromechanical and Electrical Components Electrical and electromechanical components of the Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall not cause electromagnetic interference to adjacent electrical or electromechanical equipment while in operation.

1.3.2 Electrical Requirements 1.3.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Std 519 Control panel shall have surge protection, included within the panel to protect the unit from damaging transient voltage surges. Surge arrestor shall be mounted near the incoming power source and properly wired to all three phases and ground. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

1.3.2.2 Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection I/O functions as specified shall be protected against surges induced on control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms:


a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of

1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Schematic diagrams; G

Interconnecting diagrams; G

Installation drawings; G

Submit drawings for government approval prior to equipment construction or integration. Modifications to original drawings made during installation shall be immediately recorded for inclusion into the as-built drawings.

SD-03 Product Data

Variable frequency drives; G

Wires and cables

Equipment schedule

Include data indicating compatibility with motors being driven.

SD-06 Test Reports

VFD Test

Performance Verification Tests

Endurance Test

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Installation instructions

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

VFD Factory Test Plan; G

Factory test results



Variable frequency drives, Data Package 4

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Provide service and maintenance information including preventive maintenance, assembly, and disassembly procedures. Include electrical drawings from electrical general sections. Submit additional information necessary to provide complete operation, repair, and maintenance information, detailed to the smallest replaceable unit. Include copies of as-built submittals. Provide routine preventative maintenance instructions, and equipment required. Provide instructions on how to modify program settings, and modify the control program. Provide instructions on drive adjustment, trouble-shooting, and configuration. Provide instructions on process tuning and system calibration.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Schematic Diagrams Show circuits and device elements for each replaceable module. Schematic diagrams of printed circuit boards are permitted to group functional assemblies as devices, provided that sufficient information is provided for government maintenance personnel to verify proper operation of the functional assemblies.

1.5.2 Interconnecting Diagrams Show interconnections between equipment assemblies, and external interfaces, including power and signal conductors. Include for enclosures and external devices.

1.5.3 Installation Drawings Show floor plan of each site, with V.F.D.'s and motors indicated. Indicate ventilation requirements, adequate clearances, and cable routes.

1.5.4 Equipment Schedule Provide schedule of equipment supplied. Schedule shall provide a cross reference between manufacturer data and identifiers indicated in shop drawings. Schedule shall include the total quantity of each item of equipment supplied. For complete assemblies, such as VFD's, provide the serial numbers of each assembly, and a sub-schedule of components within the assembly. Provide recommended spare parts listing for each assembly or component.

1.5.5 Installation instructions Provide installation instructions issued by the manufacturer of the equipment, including notes and recommendations, prior to shipment to the site. Provide operation instructions prior to acceptance testing.

1.5.6 Factory Test Results Document test results and submit to government within 7 working days after completion of test.


1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.

1.7 WARRANTY The complete system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of one year, or the contracted period of any extended warrantee agreed upon by the contractor and the Government, after successful completion of the acceptance test. Any component failing to perform its function as specified and documented shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Government. Items repaired or replaced shall be warranted for an additional period of at least one year from the date that it becomes functional again, as specified in the FAR CLAUSE 52.246-21.

1.8 MAINTENANCE 1.8.1 Spare Parts Manufacturers provide spare parts in accordance with recommended spare parts list.

1.8.2 Maintenance Support During the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide on-site, on-call maintenance services by Contractor's personnel on the following basis: The service shall be on a per-call basis with 36 hour response. Contractor shall support the maintenance of all hardware and software of the system. Various personnel of different expertise shall be sent on-site depending on the nature of the maintenance service required. Costs shall include travel, local transportation, living expenses, and labor rates of the service personnel while responding to the service request. The provisions of this Section are not in lieu of, nor relieve the Contractor of, warranty responsibilities covered in this specification. Should the result of the service request be the uncovering of a system defect covered under the warranty provisions, all costs for the call, including the labor necessary to identify the defect, shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) Provide frequency drive to control the speed of induction motor(s). The VFD shall include the following minimum functions, features and ratings.

a. Input circuit breaker per UL 489 with a minimum of 10,000 amps

symmetrical interrupting capacity and door interlocked external operator.

b. A converter stage per UL 508C shall change fixed voltage, fixed

frequency, ac line power to a fixed dc voltage. The converter shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers. Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) are not acceptable. The converter shall be insensitive to three phase rotation of the ac


line and shall not cause displacement power factor of less than .95 lagging under any speed and load condition.

c. An inverter stage shall change fixed dc voltage to variable

frequency, variable voltage, ac for application to a standard NEMA design B squirrel cage motor. The inverter shall be switched in a manner to produce a sine coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform.

d. The VFD shall be capable of supplying 120 percent of rated full

load current for one minute at maximum ambient temperature.

e. The VFD shall be designed to operate at the voltage stated in the Delivery or Task Order, + or - 10 percent, three phase, 60 Hz supply, and control motors with a corresponding voltage rating.

f. Acceleration and deceleration time shall be independently

adjustable from one second to 60 seconds.

g. Adjustable full-time current limiting shall limit the current to a preset value which shall not exceed 120 percent of the controller rated current. The current limiting action shall maintain the V/Hz ratio constant so that variable torque can be maintained. Short time starting override shall allow starting current to reach 175 percent of controller rated current to maximum starting torque.

h. The controllers shall be capable of producing an output frequency

over the range of 3 Hz to 60 Hz (20 to one speed range), without low speed cogging. Over frequency protection shall be included such that a failure in the controller electronic circuitry shall not cause frequency to exceed 110 percent of the maximum controller output frequency selected.

i. Minimum and maximum output frequency shall be adjustable over the

following ranges: 1) Minimum frequency 3 Hz to 50 percent of maximum selected frequency; 2) Maximum frequency 40 Hz to 60 Hz.

j. The controller efficiency at any speed shall not be less than 96

percent.

k. The controllers shall be capable of being restarted into a motor coasting in the forward direction without tripping.

l. Protection of power semiconductor components shall be accomplished

without the use of fast acting semiconductor output fuses. Subjecting the controllers to any of the following conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for fuse replacement:

1. Short circuit at controller output

2. Ground fault at controller output

3. Open circuit at controller output

4. Input undervoltage

5. Input overvoltage


6. Loss of input phase

7. AC line switching transients

8. Instantaneous overload

9. Sustained overload exceeding 115 percent of controller rated current

10. Over temperature

11. Phase reversal

m. Solid state motor overload protection shall be included such that current exceeding an adjustable threshold shall activate a 60 second timing circuit. Should current remain above the threshold continuously for the timing period, the controller will automatically shut down.

n. A slip compensation circuit shall be included which will sense

changing motor load conditions and adjust output frequency to provide speed regulation of NEMA B motors to within + / - 0.5 percent of maximum speed without the necessity of a tachometer generator.

o. The VFD shall be factory set for manual restart after the first

protective circuit trip for malfunction (overcurrent,undervoltage, overvoltage or overtemperature) or an interruption of power. The VFD shall be capable of being set for automatic restart after a selected time delay. If the drive faults again within a specified time period (adjustable 0-60 seconds), a manual restart will be required.

p. The VFD shall include external fault reset capability. All the

necessary logic to accept an external fault reset contact shall be included.

q. Provide critical speed lockout circuitry to prevent operating at

frequencies with critical harmonics that cause resonant vibrations. The VFD shall have a minimum of three user selectable bandwidths.

r. Provide the following operator control and monitoring devices

mounted on the front panel of the VFD:

1. Manual speed potentiometer.

2. Hand-Off-Auto ( HOA ) switch.

3. Power on light.

4. Drive run power light.

5. Local display.

s. Provide properly sized NEMA rated by-pass and isolation contactors to enable operation of motor in the event of VFD failure. Mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be installed between the


by-pass and isolation contactors. Provide a selector switch and transfer delay timer.

2.2 ENCLOSURES Provide equipment enclosures conforming to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 6.

2.3 WIRES AND CABLES All wires and cables shall conform to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NFPA 70.

2.4 NAMEPLATES Nameplates external to NEMA enclosures shall conform with the requirements of Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. Nameplates internal to enclosures shall be manufacturer's standard, with the exception that they must be permanent.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2.5.1 VFD Factory Test Plan To ensure quality, each VFD shall be subject to a series of in-plant quality control inspections before approval for shipment from the manufacturer's facilities. Provide test plans and test reports.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Per NEMA ICS 3.1, install equipment in accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed installation drawings, instructions, wiring diagrams, and as indicated on project drawings and the approved shop drawings. A field representative of the drive manufacturer shall supervise the installation of all equipment, and wiring.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Specified products shall be tested as a system for conformance to specification requirements prior to scheduling the acceptance tests. Contractor shall conduct performance verification tests in the presence of Government representative, observing and documenting complete compliance of the system to the specifications. Contractor shall submit a signed copy of the test results, certifying proper system operation before scheduling tests.

3.2.1 VFD Test A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer at least 28 calendar days prior to proposed testing for approval. The tests shall conform to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 7, and all manufacturer's safety regulations. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests and review any documentation. The contractor shall inform the Government at least 14 working days prior to the dates of testing. Contractor shall provide video tapes, if available, of all training provided to the Government for subsequent use in training new personnel. All training aids, texts, and expendable support material for a self-sufficient presentation


shall be provided, the amount of which to be determined by the Contracting Officer.

3.2.2 Performance Verification Tests "Performance Verification Test" plan shall provide the step by step procedure required to establish formal verification of the performance of the VFD. Compliance with the specification requirements shall be verified by inspections, review of critical data, demonstrations, and tests. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests, review data, and request other such additional inspections and repeat tests as necessary to ensure that the system and provided services conform to the stated requirements. The contractor shall inform the Government 14 calendar days prior to the date the test is to be conducted.

3.2.3 Endurance Test Immediately upon completion of the performance verification test, the endurance test shall commence. The system shall be operated at varying rates for not less than 192 consecutive hours, at an average effectiveness level of .9998, to demonstrate proper functioning of the complete PCS. Continue the test on a day-to-day basis until performance standard is met. During the endurance test, the contractor shall not be allowed in the building. The system shall respond as designed.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION 3.3.1 Training Coordinate training requirements with the Contracting Officer.

3.3.1.1 Instructions to Government Personnel Provide the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in operation, maintenance, calibration, configuration, and programming of the complete control system. Orient the training specifically to the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with the subject matter they are to teach. The Government personnel designated to attend the training will have a high school education or equivalent. The number of training days of instruction furnished shall be as specified. A training day is defined as eight hours of instruction, including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunch time; Monday through Friday. Provide a training manual for each student at each training phase which describes in detail the material included in each training program. Provide one additional copy for archiving. Provide equipment and materials required for classroom training. Provide a list of additional related courses, and offers, noting any courses recommended. List each training course individually by name, including duration, approximate cost per person, and location of course. Unused copies of training manuals shall be turned over to the Government at the end of last training session.

3.3.1.2 Operating Personnel Training Program Provide one 2 hour training session at the site at a time and place mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Government. Provide session to train 4 operation personnel in the functional operations of the system and


the procedures that personnel will follow in system operation. This training shall include:

a. System overview

b. General theory of operation

c. System operation

d. Alarm formats

e. Failure recovery procedures

f. Troubleshooting

3.3.1.3 Engineering/Maintenance Personnel Training Accomplish the training program as specified. Training shall be conducted on site at a location designated by the Government. Provide a one day training session to train 4 engineering personnel in the functional operations of the system. This training shall include:

a. System overview

b. General theory of operation

c. System operation

d. System configuration

e. Alarm formats

f. Failure recovery procedures

g. Troubleshooting and repair

h. Maintenance and calibration

i. System programming and configuration




SECTION 26 32 14.00 10

DIESEL-GENERATOR SET, STATIONARY 15-300 KW, STANDBY APPLICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.


ANSI C39.1 (1981; R 1992) Requirements for Electrical

Analog Indicating Instruments

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B16.11 (2005) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,

Classes 150 and 300 ASME B16.5 (2003) Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged

Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Power Piping

ASME BPVC SEC IX (2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications

ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code; Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1 - Basic Coverage

ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)

AEIC CS8 (2000) Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power

Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 106/A 106M (2008) Standard Specification for Seamless

Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A 135/A 135M (2006) Standard Specification for Electric-

Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe ASTM A 181/A 181M (2006) Standard Specification for Carbon

Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping


ASTM A 234/A 234M (2007) Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service

ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM B 395/B 395M (2008) Standard Specification for U-Bend

Seamless Copper and Copper Alloy Heat Exchanger and Condenser Tubes

ASTM D 975 (2008a) Standard Specification for Diesel

Fuel Oils

ELECTRICAL GENERATING SYSTEMS ASSOCIATION (EGSA) EGSA 101P (1995) Engine Driven Generator Sets


IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2007; INT 2008) National

Electrical Safety Code IEEE Std 1 (2000; R 2005) General Principles for

Temperature Limits in the Rating of Electric Equipment and for the Evaluation of Electrical Insulation

IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE

Standards Terms IEEE Std 120 (1989; R 2007) Master Test Guide for

Electrical Measurements in Power Circuits IEEE Std 404 (2006) Extruded and Laminated Dielectric

Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V Through 500 000 V

IEEE Std 48 (1996; R 2003) Test Procedures and

Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations 2.5 kV through 765 kV

IEEE Std 519 (1992; Errata 2004) Recommended Practices and

Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems

IEEE Std 81 (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,


MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)


MSS SP-58 (2002) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture

MSS SP-69 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and

Supports - Selection and Application MSS SP-80 (2003) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check

Valves

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA AB 1 (2002) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded

Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures NEMA C12.11 (2007) Instrument Transformers for Revenue

Metering, 10 kV BIL through 350 kV BIL (0.6 kV NSV through 69 kV NSV)




Controls and Systems Enclosures NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and

Generators NEMA PB 1 (2006; Errata 2008) Standard for Panelboards

NEMA WC 74 (2006) Standard for 5-46 kV Shielded Power

Cable for use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy


NFPA 110 (2005) Standard for Emergency and Standby

Power Systems NFPA 30 (2007; Errata 2008) Flammable and Combustible

Liquids Code NFPA 37 (2006) Installation and Use of Stationary

Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines NFPA 70 (2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code -

2008 Edition NFPA 99 (2005; Errata 2005) Health Care Facilities

SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

SAE ARP892 (1965; R 1994) DC Starter-Generator, Engine


SAE J537 (2000) Storage Batteries

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1236 (2006) Standard for Safety Battery Chargers

for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries UL 489 (2002; Rev thru Jun 2006) Standard for


UL 891 (2005) Dead-Front Switchboards

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

a. Furnish and install each engine-generator set complete and totally functional, with all necessary ancillary equipment to include air filtration; starting system; generator controls, protection, and isolation; instrumentation; lubrication; fuel system; cooling system; and engine exhaust system. Each engine generator set shall satisfy the requirements specified in the Engine Generator Parameter Schedule.

b. Provide each engine-generator set consisting of one engine, one generator, and one exciter, mounted, assembled, and aligned on one base; and all other necessary ancillary equipment which may be mounted separately. Sets shall be assembled and attached to the base prior to shipping. Set components shall be environmentally suitable for the locations shown and shall be the manufacturer's standard product offered in catalogs for commercial or industrial use. Provide a generator strip heater for moisture control when the generator is not operating.

1.2.1 Engine-Generator Parameter Schedule Engine-Generator Parameter Schedule shall be provided as described below with the Delivery Order.

ENGINE GENERATOR PARAMETER SCHEDULE

Service Load _____ kVA or kW

Power Factor _____ lagging

Motor Starting kVA (maximum) _____ kVA

Maximum Speed 1800 rpm

Engine-Generator Application stand-alone

Engine Cooling Type water/ethylene glycol

Heat Exchanger Type fin-tube or shell-tube

Governor Type Isochronous

Frequency Bandwidth + _____ percent steady state


Governor Type Droop

Frequency Regulation (droop) _____ percent (max.) (No load to full load)

Frequency Bandwidth + _____ percent (steady state)

Voltage Regulation + 2 percent (max.) (No load to full load)

Voltage Bandwidth + _____ percent (steady state)

Frequency 60 Hz

Voltage _____ volts

Phases _____

Minimum Generator _____ percent Subtransient Reactance

Nonlinear Loads _____ kVA

Max Step Load Increase _____ percent of Service Load at _____ PF

Max Step Load Decrease (w/o shutdown) 100 percent of Service Load at _____ PF

Max Time to Start and be Ready to _____ seconds Assume Load

Max Summer Indoor Temp _____ degrees (Prior to Genset Operation)

Min Winter Indoor Temp _____ degrees (Prior to Genset Operation)

Max Allowable Heat Transferred _____ MBTUH/hr. To Engine Generator Space at Rated Output Capacity

Max Summer Outdoor Temp _____ degrees (Ambient)

Min Winter Outdoor Temp _____ degrees (Ambient)

Installation Elevation _____ above sea level

1.2.2 Output Capacity Provide each generator set whith power equal to the sum of service load plus the machine's efficiency loss and associated ancillary equipment loads.


Rated output capacity shall also consider engine and/or generator oversizing required to meet requirements in paragraph Engine-Generator Parameter Schedule.

1.2.3 Power Rating Standby ratings shall be in accordance with EGSA 101P.

1.2.4 Engine Generator Set Enclosure The engine generator set enclosure shall be corrosion resistant, fully weather resistant, contain all set components, and provide ventilation to permit operation at rated load under secured conditions. Provide doors for access to all controls and equipment requiring periodic maintenance or adjustment. Provide removable panels for access to components requiring periodic replacement. The enclosure shall be capable of being removed without disassembly of the engine-generator set or removal of components other than exhaust system. The enclosure shall reduce the noise of the generator set to within the limits specified in the paragraph SOUND LIMITATIONS.

1.2.5 Vibration Isolation The maximum engine-generator set vibration in the horizontal, vertical and axial directions shall be limited to 6 mils (peak-peak RMS), with an overall velocity limit of 0.95 inches/seconds RMS, for all speeds through 110 percent of rated speed. The engine-generator set shall be provided with vibration-isolation in accordance with the manufacturer's standard recommendation. Where the vibration-isolation system does not secure the base to the structure floor or unit foundation, provide seismic restraints in accordance with the seismic parameters specified.


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detailed Drawings; G

Detailed drawings, as specified.

Acceptance; G

Drawings which accurately depict the as-built configuration of the installation, upon acceptance of the diesel-generator set installation. Revise layout drawings to reflect the as-built conditions and submit them with the as-built drawings.

SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturer's Catalog


Manufacturer's standard catalog data describing and depicting each engine-generator set and all ancillary equipment in sufficient detail to demonstrate specification compliance.

Instructions; G

Instructions including: the manufacturer's pre-start checklist and precautions; startup procedures for test mode, manual-start mode, and automatic-start mode, (as applicable); running checks, procedures, and precautions; and shutdown procedures, checks, and precautions. Instructions shall include procedures for interrelated equipment (such as heat recovery systems, co-generation, load-shedding, and automatic transfer switches). Instructions shall be weatherproof, laminated in plastic, framed, and posted where directed. Posted data shall include wiring and control diagrams showing the key mechanical and electrical control elements, and a diagrammatic layout of the system.

Experience

Statement showing that each component manufacturer has a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacture, assembly and sale of components used with stationary diesel-engine generator sets for commercial and industrial use. The engine-generator set manufacturer/assembler has a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacture, assembly and sale of stationary diesel engine-generator sets for commercial and industrial use.

Field Engineer

A letter listing the qualifications, schools, formal training, and experience of the field engineer.

Site Welding

A letter listing the welder qualifying procedures for each welder, complete with supporting data such as test procedures used, what was tested to, and a list of the names of all welders and their qualifications symbols.

General Installation

A complete copy of the manufacturer's installation procedures. A detailed description of the manufacturer's recommended break-in procedure.

Site Visit

A site visit letter stating the date the site was visited and listing discrepancies found.

SD-05 Design Data

Sound Limitations; G

Sound power level data for the packaged unit operating at 100 percent load in a free field environment. The data should


demonstrate compliance with the sound limitation requirements of this specification.

Generator

Each generator KW rating and short circuit capacity (both symmetric and asymmetric).

Integral Main Fuel Storage Tank Day Tank

Calculations for the capacity of each day tank, including allowances for recirculated fuel, usable tank capacity, and duration of fuel supply.

Power Factor

Generator capability curve showing generator kVA output (kW vs. kvar) for both leading and lagging power factors ranging from 0 to 1.0.

Heat Exchanger

Manufacturers data to quantify heat rejected to the space with the engine generator set at rated capacity.

Time-Delay on Alarms

The magnitude of monitored values which define alarm or action setpoints, and the tolerance (plus and/or minus) at which the device activates the alarm or action.

Cooling System

a. The maximum and minimum allowable inlet temperatures of the coolant fluid or air.

b. The maximum allowable temperature rise in the coolant fluid through the engine or cooling air across the engine.

c. The minimum allowable inlet fuel temperature.

Vibration Isolation

Vibration isolation system performance data for the range of frequencies generated by the engine-generator set during operation from no load to full load and the maximum vibration transmitted to the floor. Description of seismic qualification of the engine-generator mounting, base, and vibration isolation.

SD-06 Test Reports

Performance Tests

Calculations of the engine and generator output power capability, including efficiency and parasitic load data.


Onsite Inspection and Tests; G

a. A letter giving notice of the proposed dates of all onsite inspections and tests at least 14 days prior to beginning tests.

b. A detailed description of the Contractor's proposed procedures for onsite tests including the test including the test plan and a listing of equipment necessary to perform the tests. Submission shall be at least 21 days prior to beginning tests.

c. Six copies of the onsite test data described below in 8-1/2 by 11 inch 3-ring binders with a separate section for each test. Sections shall be separated by dividers with tabs. Data plots shall be full size 8-1/2 by 11 inches minimum), showing all grid lines, with full resolution.

(1) A description of the procedures for onsite tests.

(2) A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.

(3) A copy of measurements taken, with required plots and graphs.

(4) The date of testing.

(5) The parameters verified.

(6) The condition specified for the parameter.

(7) The test results, signed and dated.

(8) A description of all adjustments made.

SD-07 Certificates

Vibration Isolation

Torsional analysis including prototype testing or calculations which certify and demonstrate that no damaging or dangerous torsional vibrations will occur when the prime mover is connected to the generator, at synchronous speeds, plus/minus 10 percent.

Prototype Tests

Manufacturer's standard certification that prototype tests were performed for the generator model proposed.

Reliability and Durability

Documentation which cites engines and generators in similar service to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this specification. Certification does not exclude annual technological improvements made by a manufacturer in the basic standard model set on which experience was obtained, provided parts interchangeability has not been substantially affected and the current standard model meets all the performance requirements of this specification. For each different set, 2 like sets shall have performed satisfactorily


in a stationary power application, independent and separate from the physical location of the manufacturer's and assembler's facilities, for a minimum of 2 consecutive years without any failure to start, including periodic exercise. The certification shall state that for the set proposed to meet this specification, there were no failures resulting in downtime for repairs in excess of 72 hours or any failure due to overheating during 2 consecutive years of service. Like sets are of the same model, speed, bore, stroke, number and configuration of cylinders, and output power rating. Like generators are of the same model, speed, pitch, cooling, exciter, voltage regulator and output power rating. A list shall be provided with the name of the installations, completion dates, and name and telephone number of a point of contact.

Emissions

A certification from the engine manufacturer stating that the engine exhaust emissions meet federal, state, and local regulations and restrictions specified. At a minimum, this certification shall include emission factors for criteria pollutants including nitrogen oxides, carbon monoxide, particulate matter, sulfur dioxide, non-methane hydrocarbon, and for hazardous air pollutants (HAPs).

Sound limitations

A certification from the manufacturer stating that the sound emissions meet the specification.

Current Balance

Manufacturer's certification that the flywheel has been statically and dynamically balanced and is capable of being rotated at 125 percent of rated speed without vibration or damage.

Materials and Equipment

A letter certifying that where materials or equipment are specified to comply with requirements of UL, or other standards, written proof of such compliance has been obtained. The label or listing of the specified agency, or a written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of the specified agency are acceptable as proof.

Factory Inspection and Tests

A certification that each engine generator set passed the factory tests and inspections and a list of the test and inspections.

Inspections

A letter certifying that all facilities are complete and functional, that each system is fully functional, and that each item of equipment is complete, free from damage, adjusted, and ready for beneficial use.


Cooling System

Certification that the engine-generator set and cooling system function properly in the ambient temperatures specified.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Conformance to Codes and Standards Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of any code or standard such as UL, the design, fabrication and installation shall conform to the code.

1.4.2 Site Welding Weld structural members in accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL. For all other welding, qualify procedures and welders in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by a previously qualified employer may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. Welder qualification tests shall be performed for each welder whose qualifications are not in compliance with the referenced standards. Notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours in advance of qualification tests. The qualification tests shall be performed at the work site if practical. The welder or welding operator shall apply the assigned personal symbol near each weld made as a permanent record

1.4.3 Experience Each component manufacturer shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacture, assembly and sale of components used with stationary diesel engine-generator sets for commercial and industrial use. The engine-generator set manufacture/assembler shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacture, assembly and sale of stationary diesel engine-generator sets for commercial and industrial use.

1.4.4 Field Engineer The engine-generator set manufacturer or assembler shall furnish a qualified field engineer to supervise the complete installation of the engine-generator set, assist in the performance of the onsite tests, and instruct personnel as to the operational and maintenance features of the equipment. The field engineer shall have attended the engine-generator manufacturer's training courses on installation and operation and maintenance for engine generator sets.

1.4.5 Seismic Requirements Seismic requirements shall be in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 SEISMIC DESIGN FOR BUILDINGS and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT, 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT and 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.

1.4.6 Detailed Drawings Submit detailed drawings showing the following:


a. Base-mounted equipment, complete with base and attachments including anchor bolt template and recommended clearances for maintenance and operation.

b. Starting system.

c. Fuel system.

d. Cooling system.

e. Exhaust system.

f. Electric wiring of relays, breakers, programmable controllers, and switches including single line and wiring diagrams.

g. Lubrication system, including piping, pumps, strainers, filters, heat exchangers for lube oil and turbocharger cooling, controls and wiring.

h. Location, type, and description of vibration isolation devices.

i. The safety system, including wiring schematics.

j. One-line schematic and wiring diagrams of the generator, exciter, regulator, governor, and all instrumentation.

k. Panel layouts.

l. Mounting and support for each panel and major piece of electrical equipment.

m. Engine-generator set rigging points and lifting instructions.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Properly protect materials and equipment in accordance with the manufacturers recommended storage procedures, before, during, and after installation. Protect stored items from the weather and contamination. During installation, piping and similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.

1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE Submit the operation and maintenance manuals and have them approved prior to commencing onsite tests.

1.6.1 Operation Manual Provide three copies of the manufacturers standard operation manual. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs which identify the material in the section. Drawings shall be folded blue lines, with the title block visible, and placed in 8-1/2 by 11 inch plastic pockets with reinforced holes. The manual shall include:

a. Step-by-step procedures for system startup, operation, and shutdown;


b. Drawings, diagrams, and single-line schematics to illustrate and define the electrical, mechanical, and hydraulic systems with their controls, alarms, and safety systems;

c. Procedures for interface and interaction with related systems to include automatic transfer switches fire alarm/suppression systems load shedding systems and/or uninterruptible power supplies as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

1.6.2 Maintenance Manual Provide three copies of the manufacturers standard maintenance manual. Each section shall be separated by a heavy plastic divider with tabs. Drawings shall be folded, with the title block visible, and placed in plastic pockets with reinforced holes. The manual shall include:

a. Procedures for each routine maintenance item, procedures for troubleshooting and factory-service, take-down overhaul, and repair service manuals, with parts lists.

b. The manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

c. A component list which includes the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, rating, and catalog number for the major components listed in paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

d. A list of spare parts for each piece of equipment and a complete list of materials and supplies needed for operation.

1.6.3 Extra Materials Provide two sets of special tools and two sets of filters required for maintenance. Special tools are those that only the manufacturer provides, for special purposes, or to reach otherwise inaccessible parts. One handset shall be provided for each electronic governor when required to indicate and/or change governor response settings. Supply two complete sets of filters in a suitable storage box in addition to filters replaced after testing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES Each major component of this specification shall have the manufacturer's name, type or style, model or serial number, and rating number on a plate secured to the equipment. As a minimum, nameplates shall be provided for: Engines; Relays; Generators; Day tanks; Transformers (CT & PT); Regulators; Pumps and pump motors; Governors; Generator Breaker; Economizers; Heat exchangers (other than base-mounted).

Engines Relays

Generators Day tanks

Transformers (CT & PT) Regulators


Pumps and pump motors Governors

Generator Breaker Economizers

Heat exchangers (other than base-mounted) Where the following equipment is provided as a standard component by the diesel-engine generator set manufacturer, the nameplate information may be provided in the maintenance manual in lieu of nameplates.

Battery charger Heaters Exhaust mufflers Exciters Switchgear Silencers Battery

2.2 SAFETY DEVICES Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperatures, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel during normal operation shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices. The safety devices shall be installed so that proper operation of the equipment is not impaired.

2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials and equipment shall be as specified.

2.3.1 Circuit Breakers, Low Voltage NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

2.3.2 Filter Elements (Fuel-oil, Lubricating-oil, and Combustion-air) Manufacturer's standard.

2.3.3 Instrument Transformers NEMA C12.11.

2.3.4 Pipe (Fuel/Lube-oil, Compressed-Air, Coolant and Exhaust) ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 106/A 106M or ASTM A 135/A 135M, steel pipe. Pipe smaller than 2 inches shall be Schedule 80. Pipe 2 inches and larger shall be Schedule 40.

2.3.5 Pipe Flanges and Fittings

a. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASTM A 181/A 181M, Class 60, or ASME B16.5, Grade 1, Class 150.

b. Pipe Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, Grade WPB or WPC, Class 150, or ASME B16.11, 3000 lb.

c. Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150.

d. Valves: MSS SP-80, Class 150.


e. Gaskets: Manufacturers Standard.

2.3.6 Pipe Hangers MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

2.3.7 Electrical Enclosures 2.3.7.1 General NEMA ICS 6.

2.3.7.2 Panelboards NEMA PB 1.

2.3.8 Electric Motors Electric motors shall conform to the requirements of NEMA MG 1. Motors shall have sealed ball bearings, a maximum speed of 1800 rpm and integral automatic or manual reset thermal overload protectors. Motors used indoors shall have drip proof frames; those used outside shall be totally enclosed. AC motors larger than 1/2 Hp shall be of the squirrel cage induction type for standard voltage as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, 60 Hz, three phase power. AC motors 1/2 Hp or smaller, shall be for standard voltage, 60 Hz, single phase power.

2.3.9 Motor Controllers Motor controllers and starters shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and NEMA ICS 2.

2.4 ENGINE Each engine shall operate on No. 2-D diesel conforming to ASTM D 975, shall be designed for stationary applications and shall be complete with ancilliaries. The engine shall be a standard production model described in the manufacturer's catalog. The engine shall be naturally aspirated, scavenged, supercharged or turbocharged. The engine shall be two- or four-stroke-cycle and compression-ignition type. The engine shall be vertical inline, V-, or opposed-piston type, with a solid cast block or individually cast cylinders. The engine shall have a minimum of two cylinders. Opposed-piston type engines shall have no less than four cylinders. Each block shall have a coolant drain port. Each engine shall be equipped with an overspeed sensor.

2.5 FUEL SYSTEM The fuel system for each engine generator set shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 30 and NFPA 37 and contain the following elements.

2.5.1 Pumps 2.5.1.1 Main Pump


Each engine shall be provided with an engine driven pump. The pump shall supply fuel at a minimum rate sufficient to provide the amount of fuel required to meet the performance indicated within the parameter schedule. The fuel flow rate shall be based on meeting the load requirements and all necessary recirculation.

2.5.1.2 Auxiliary Fuel Pump Auxiliary fuel pumps shall be provided to maintain the required engine fuel pressure, either required by the installation or indicated on the drawings. The auxiliary pump shall be driven by a dc electric motor powered by the starting/station batteries. The auxiliary pump shall be automatically actuated by a pressure detecting device.

2.5.2 Filter A minimum of one full flow fuel filter shall be provided for each engine. The filter shall be readily accessible and capable of being changed without disconnecting the piping or disturbing other components. The filter shall have inlet and outlet connections plainly marked.

2.5.3 Relief/Bypass Valve A relief/bypass valve shall be provided to regulate pressure in the fuel supply line, return excess fuel to a return line, and prevent the build-up of excessive pressure in the fuel system.

2.5.4 Integral Main Fuel Storage Tank Each engine shall be provided with an integral main fuel tank. Each tank shall be factory installed and provided as an integral part of the diesel generator manufacturer's product. Each tank shall be provided with connections for fuel supply line, fuel return line, local fuel fill port, gauge, vent line, and float switch assembly. A fuel return line cooler shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer and assembler. The temperature of the fuel returning to the tank shall be below the flash point of the fuel. Each engine-generator set provided with weatherproof enclosures shall have its tank mounted within the enclosure. The fuel fill line shall be accessible without opening the enclosure.

2.5.4.1 Capacity Each tank shall have capacity to supply fuel to the engine for an uninterrupted period as stated in the Delivery or Task Order at 100 percent rated load without being refilled.

2.5.4.2 Local Fuel Fill Each local fuel fill port on the day tank shall be provided with a screw-on cap.

2.5.4.3 Fuel Level Controls Each tank shall have a float-switch assembly to perform the following functions:


a. Activate the "Low Fuel Level" alarm at 70 percent of the rated tank capacity.

b. Activate the "Overfill Fuel Level" alarm at 95 percent of the rated tank capacity.

2.5.4.4 Arrangement Integral tanks may allow gravity flow into the engine. Gravity flow tanks and any tank that allows a fuel level above the fuel injectors shall be provided with an internal or external factory installed valve located as near as possible to the shell of the tank. The valve shall close when the engine is not operating. Integral day tanks shall be provided with any necessary pumps to supply fuel to the engine as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. The fuel supply line from the tank to the manufacturer's standard engine connection shall be welded pipe.

2.5.5 Day Tank Each engine shall be provided with a separate self-supporting or integral day tank. Each day tank shall be provided with connections for fuel supply line, fuel overflow line, local fuel fill port, gauge, vent line, drain line, and float switch assembly for control. Each engine-generator set provided with weatherproof enclosures shall have its day tank mounted within the enclosure. The fuel fill line shall be accessible without opening the enclosure.

2.5.5.1 Capacity, Standby Each day tank shall have capacity as shown.

2.5.5.2 Drain Line Each day tank drain line shall be accessible and equipped with a shutoff valve. Self supporting day tanks shall be arranged to allow drainage into a 12 inch tall bucket.

2.5.5.3 Local Fuel Fill Each local fuel fill port on the day tank shall be provided with a screw-on cap.

2.5.5.4 Fuel Level Controls Each day tank shall have a float-switch-assembly to perform the following functions:

a. When the main storage tank is located higher than the day tank, open the solenoid valve located on the fuel supply line entering the day tank and start the supply of fuel into the day tank when the fuel level is at the "Low" level mark, 75 percent of the rated tank capacity.

b. When the main storage tank is located higher than the day tank, stop the supply of fuel into the day tank and close the solenoid valve located on the fuel supply line entering the day tank when the fuel level is at 90 percent of the rated tank capacity.


c. Activate the "Overfill Fuel Level" alarm at 95 percent of the rated tank volume.

d. Activate the "Low Fuel Level" alarm at 70 percent of the rated tank Capacity.

e. Activate the automatic fuel supply shut-off valve located on the fill line of the day tank and shut down the fuel pump which supplies fuel to the day tank at 95 percent of the rated tank volume. The flow of fuel shall be stopped before any fuel can be forced into the fuel overflow line.

2.5.5.5 Arrangement Integral day tanks may allow gravity flow into the engine. Gravity flow tanks shall be provided with an internal or external valve located as near as possible to the shell of the tank. The valve shall close when the engine is not operating. Integral day tanks shall be provided with any necessary pumps to supply fuel to the engine as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. The overflow connection and the fuel supply line for integral day tanks which do not rely upon gravity flow shall be arranged so that the highest possible fuel level is below the fuel injectors. Self-supporting day tanks shall either be arranged so that the fuel level in the day tank remains above the suction port of the engine driven fuel pump or be provided with a transfer pump to provide fuel to the engine driven pump. The overflow connection and fuel supply line shall be arranged so that the highest possible fuel level is below the fuel injectors. When the main fuel storage tanks are located below the day tank, a check valve shall be provided in the fuel supply line entering the day tank. When the main fuel storage tanks are located above the day tank, a solenoid valve shall be installed in the fuel supply line entering the day tank. The solenoid valve shall be in addition to the automatic fuel shut off valve. The fuel supply line from the day tank to the manufacturer's standard engine connection shall be welded pipe.

2.5.6 Fuel Supply System The fuel supply from the main storage of fuel to the day tank shall be as specified in Section 33 56 10 FACTORY-FABRICATED FUEL STORAGE TANKS.

2.6 LUBRICATION Each engine shall have a separate lube-oil system conforming to NFPA 30 and NFPA 37. Each system shall be pressurized by engine-driven oil pumps. Each system shall be furnished with a relief valve for oil pressure regulation (for closed systems) and a dip-stick for oil level indications. The crankcase shall be vented in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation except that it shall not be vented to the engine exhaust system. Crankcase breathers, if provided on engines installed in buildings or enclosures, shall be piped to vent to the outside. The system shall be readily accessible for service such as draining, refilling, etc. Each system shall permit addition of oil and have oil-level indication with the set operating. The system shall utilize an oil cooler as recommended by the engine manufacturer.


2.6.1 Filter One full-flow filter shall be provided for each pump. The filter shall be readily accessible and capable of being changed without disconnecting the piping or disturbing other components. The filter shall have inlet and outlet connections plainly marked.

2.6.2 Lube-Oil Sensors Each engine shall be equipped with lube-oil pressure sensors. Pressure sensors shall be located downstream of the filters and provide signals for required indication and alarms.

2.7 COOLING SYSTEM Each engine cooling system shall operate automatically while the engine is running. Each cooling system shall be sized for the maximum summer design temperature and site elevation. Water-cooled system coolant shall use a combination of water and ethylene-glycol sufficient for freeze protection at the minimum winter outdoor temperature specified. The maximum temperature rise of the coolant across the engine shall be no more than that recommended and submitted in accordance with paragraph SUBMITTALS.

2.7.1 Coolant Pumps Coolant pumps shall be the centrifugal type. Each engine shall have an engine-driven primary pump. Secondary pumps shall be electric motor driven and have automatic controllers.

2.7.2 Heat Exchanger Each heat exchanger shall be of a size and capacity to limit the maximum allowable temperature rise in the coolant across the engine to that recommended and submitted in accordance with paragraph SUBMITTALS for the maximum summer outdoor design temperature and site elevation. Each heat exchanger shall be corrosion resistant, suitable for service in ambient conditions of application.

2.7.2.1 Fin-Tube-Type Heat Exchanger (Radiator) Heat exchanger may be factory coated with corrosive resistant film providing that corrosion measures are taken to restore the heat rejection capability of the radiator to the initial design requirement via oversizing, or other compensating methods. Internal surfaces shall be compatible with liquid fluid coolant used. Materials and coolant are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Heat exchangers shall be pressure type incorporating a pressure valve, vacuum valve and a cap. Caps shall be designed for pressure relief prior to removal. Each heat exchanger and the entire cooling system shall be capable of withstanding a minimum pressure of 7 psi. Each heat exchanger shall be protected with a strong grille or screen guard. Each heat exchanger shall have at least two tapped holes. One tapped hole in the heat exchanger shall be equipped with a drain cock, the rest shall be plugged.

2.7.2.2 Shell and U-Tube Type Heat Exchanger


Heat exchanger shall be multiple pass shell and U-tube type. Exchanger shall operate with low temperature water in the shell and high temperature water in the tubes. Exchangers shall be constructed in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and certified ASME stamp secured to the unit. U-tube bundles shall be completely removable for cleaning and tube replacement and shall be free to expand with the shell. Shells shall be constructed of seamless steel pipe or welded steel. Tubes shall be cupronickel or inhibited admiralty, constructed in accordance with ASTM B 395/B 395M, suitable for the temperature and pressure specified. Tubes shall be not less than 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. Shell side and tube side shall be designed for 150 psi working pressure and factory tested at 300 psi. High and low temperature water and pressure relief connections shall be located in accordance with the manufacturers standard practice. Water connections larger than 3 inches shall be ASME Class 150 flanged. Water pressure loss through clean tubes shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Minimum water velocity through tubes shall be 1 foot per second and assure turbulent flow. One or more pressure relief valves shall be provided for each heat exchanger in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. The aggregate relieving capacity of the relief valves shall be not less than that required by the above code. Discharge from the valves shall be installed as indicated. The relief valves shall be installed on the heat exchanger shell. A drain connection with 3/4 inch hose bib shall be installed at the lowest point in the system near the heat exchanger. Additional drain connection with threaded cap or plug shall be installed wherever required for thorough draining of the system.

2.7.3 Expansion Tank The cooling system shall include an air expansion tank which will accommodate the expanded water of the system generated within the normal operating temperature range, limiting the pressure increase at all components in the system to the maximum allowable pressure at those components. The tank shall be suitable for an operating temperature of 250 degrees F and a working pressure of 125 psi. The tank shall be constructed of welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 for the stated working pressure. A bladder type tank shall not be used. The tank shall be supported by steel legs or bases for vertical installation or steel saddles for horizontal installation.

2.7.4 Ductwork Ductwork shall be as specified elswhere in these specifications except that a flexible connection shall be used to connect the duct to the diesel engine radiator. Material for the connection shall be wire-reinforced glass. The connection shall be rendered practically airtight.

2.7.5 Temperature Sensors Each engine shall be equipped with coolant temperature sensors. Temperature sensors shall provide signals for pre-high and high indication and alarms.

2.8 SOUND LIMITATIONS The noise generated by the diesel generator set operating at 100 percent load shall not exceed sound pressure levels as stated in the Delivery or Task Order at any frequency when measured in a free field at a radial distance of 22.9 feet at 45 degrees apart in all directions.


The noise generated by the installed diesel generator set operating at 100 percent load shall not exceed sound pressure levels as stated in the Delivery or Task Order at any frequency when measured at a distance of 75 feet from the end of the exhaust and air intake piping directly along the path of intake and discharge for horizontal piping; or at a radius of 75 feet from the engine at 45 degrees apart in all directions for vertical piping.

2.9 AIR INTAKE EQUIPMENT Filters and silencers shall be provided in locations that are convenient for servicing. The silencer shall be of the high-frequency filter type, located in the air intake system as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Silencer shall be capable of reducing the noise level at the air intake to a point below the maximum acceptable levels specified in paragraph SOUND LIMITATIONS. A combined filter-silencer unit meeting requirements for the separate filter and silencer items may be provided. Expansion elements in air-intake lines shall be rubber.

2.10 EXHAUST SYSTEM The system shall be separate and complete for each engine. Piping shall be supported so as to minimize vibration. Where a V-type engine is provided, a V-type connector with necessary flexible sections and hardware shall connect the engine exhaust outlets.

2.10.1 Flexible Sections and Expansion Joints A flexible section at each engine and an expansion joint at each muffler shall be provided. Flexible sections and expansion joints shall have flanged connections. Flexible sections shall be made of convoluted seamless tube without joints or packing. Expansion joints shall be the bellows type. Expansion and flexible elements shall be stainless steel suitable for diesel-engine exhaust gas at the maximum exhaust temperature that is specified by the engine manufacturer. Expansion and flexible elements shall be capable of absorbing vibration from the engine and compensation for thermal expansion and contraction.

2.10.2 Exhaust Muffler A chamber type exhaust muffler shall be provided. The muffler shall be constructed of welded steel. Eyebolts, lugs, flanges, or other items shall be provided as necessary for support in the location and position indicated. Pressure drop through the muffler shall not exceed the recommendations of the engine manufacturer. Outside mufflers shall be zinc coated or painted with high temperature 400 degrees F resisting paint. The muffler and exhaust piping together shall reduce the noise level to less than the maximum acceptable level listed for sound limitations in paragraph SOUND LIMITATIONS. The muffler shall have a drain valve, nipple, and cap at the low-point of the muffler.

2.10.3 Exhaust Piping Horizontal sections of exhaust piping shall be sloped downward away from the engine to a condensate trap and drain valve. Changes in direction shall be


long-radius. Exhaust piping, mufflers and silencers installed inside any building shall be insulated in accordance with paragraph THERMAL INSULATION and covered to protect personnel. Vertical exhaust piping shall be provided with a hinged, gravity operated, self-closing, rain cover.

2.11 EMISSIONS The finished installation shall comply with Federal, state, and local regulations and restrictions regarding the limits of emissions.

2.12 STARTING SYSTEM The starting system for standby engine generator sets used in emergency applications shall be in accordance with NFPA 99 and NFPA 110 and as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.12.1 Controls An engine control switch shall be provided with functions including: run/start (manual), off/reset, and automatic mode. Start-stop logic shall be provided for adjustable cycle cranking and cool down operation. The logic shall be arranged for manual starting and fully automatic starting in accordance with paragraph AUTOMATIC ENGINE-GENERATOR SET SYSTEM OPERATION. Electrical starting systems shall be provided with an adjustable cranking limit device to limit cranking periods from 1 second up to the maximum duration.

2.12.2 Capacity The starting system shall be of sufficient capacity, at the maximum summer temperature specified to crank the engine without damage or overheating. The system shall be capable of providing a minimum of three cranking periods with 15-second intervals between cranks. Each cranking period shall have a maximum duration of 15 seconds.

2.12.3 Functional Requirements Starting system shall be manufacturers recommended dc system utilizing a negative circuit ground. Starting motors shall be in accordance with SAE ARP892.

2.12.4 Battery A starting battery system shall be provided and shall include the battery, battery rack, intercell connectors, and spacers. The battery shall be in accordance with SAE J537. Critical system components (rack, protection, etc.) shall be sized to withstand the seismic acceleration forces specified. The battery shall be lead-acid or nickel-cadmium type, with sufficient capacity, at the minimum winter temperature specified to provide the specified cranking periods. Valve-regulated lead-acid batteries are not acceptable.

2.12.5 Battery Charger A current-limiting battery charger, conforming to UL 1236, shall be provided and shall automatically recharge the batteries. The charger shall be capable of an equalize charging rate for recharging fully depleted batteries


within 24 hours and a float charge rate for maintaining the batteries in prime starting condition. An ammeter shall be provided to indicate charging rate. A timer shall be provided for the equalize charging rate setting. A battery is considered to be fully depleted when the output voltage falls to a value which will not operate the engine generator set and its components.

2.12.6 Starting Aids The manufacturer shall provide one or more of the following methods to assist engine starting.

2.12.6.1 Glow Plugs Glow plugs shall be designed to provide sufficient heat for combustion of fuel within the cylinders to guarantee starting at an ambient temperature of minus 25 degrees F.

2.12.6.2 Jacket-Coolant Heaters A thermostatically controlled electric heater shall be mounted in the engine coolant jacketing to automatically maintain the coolant within plus or minus 3 degrees of the control temperature. The heater shall operate independently of engine operation so that starting times are minimized. The control temperature shall be the temperature recommended by the engine manufacturer to meet the starting time specified.

2.13 GOVERNOR Each engine shall be provided with a governor which maintains the frequency within a bandwidth of the rated frequency, over a steady-state load range of zero to 100 percent of rated output capacity. The governor shall be configured for safe manual adjustment of the speed/frequency during operation of the engine generator set, without special tools, from 90 to 110 percent of the rated speed/frequency, over a steady state load range of zero to 100 percent of rated capacity. Isochronous governors shall maintain the midpoint of the frequency bandwidth at the same value for steady-state loads over the range of zero to 100 percent of rated output capacity. Droop governors shall maintain the midpoint of the frequency bandwidth linearly for steady-state loads over the range of zero to 100 percent of rated output capacity, with 3 perent droop.

2.14 GENERATOR Each generator shall be of the synchronous type, one or two bearing, conforming to NEMA MG 1, equipped with winding terminal housings in accordance with NEMA MG 1, equipped with an amortisseur winding, and directly connected to the engine. Generator design shall protect against mechanical, electrical and thermal damage due to vibration, 25 percent overspeeds, or voltages and temperatures at a rated output capacity of 100 percent. Generator ancillary equipment shall meet the short circuit requirements of NEMA MG 1. Frames shall be the drip-proof type.

2.14.1 Current Balance At 100 percent rated load, and load impedance equal for each of the three phases, the permissible current difference between any two phases shall not exceed 2 percent of the largest current on either of the two phases.


2.14.2 Voltage Balance At any balanced load between 75 and 100 percent of rated load, the difference in line-to-neutral voltage among the three phases shall not exceed 1 percent of the average line-to-neutral voltage. For a single-phase load condition, consisting of 25 percent load at unity power factor placed between any phase and neutral with no load on the other two phases, the maximum simultaneous difference in line-to-neutral voltage between the phases shall not exceed 3 percent of rated line to neutral voltage. The single-phase load requirement shall be valid utilizing normal exciter and regulator control. The interpretation of the 25 percent load for single phase load conditions means 25 percent of rated current at rated phase voltage and unity power factor.

2.14.3 Waveform The deviation factor of the line-to-line voltage at zero load and at balanced full rated load at 0.8 power factor shall not exceed 10 percent. The RMS of all harmonics shall be less than 5.0 percent and that of any one harmonic less than 3.0 percent at full rated load. Each engine-generator shall be designed and configured to meet the total harmonic distortion limits of IEEE Std 519.

2.15 EXCITER The generator exciter shall be of the brushless type. Semiconductor rectifiers shall have a minimum safety factor of 300 percent for peak inverse voltage and forward current ratings for all operating conditions, including 110 percent generator output at 104 degrees F ambient. The exciter and regulator in combination shall maintain generator-output voltage within the limits specified.

2.16 VOLTAGE REGULATOR Each generator shall be provided with a solid-state voltage regulator, separate from the exciter. The regulator shall maintain the voltage within a bandwidth of the rated voltage, over a steady-state load range of zero to 100 percent of rated output capacity. Regulator shall be configured for safe manual adjustment of the engine generator voltage output without special tools, during operation from 90 to 110 percent of the rated voltage over the steady state load range of zero to 100 percent of rated output capacity. Regulation drift shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5 percent for an ambient temperature change of 36 degrees F. The voltage regulator shall have a maximum droop of 2 percent of rated voltage over a load range from 0 to 100 percent of rated output capacity and automatically maintain the generator output voltage within the specified operational bandwidth.

2.17 GENERATOR PROTECTION Short circuit and overload protection for the generator shall be provided. The generator circuit breaker (IEEE Device 52) ratings shall be consistent with the generator rated voltage and frequency, with continuous, short circuit and interrupting current ratings to match the generator capacity. The manufacturer shall determine the short circuit current interrupting rating of the breaker. The breaker shall be engine generator base mounted by the engine-generator set manufacturer. Molded case breakers shall be


provided with shunt trip. Surge protection shall be provided for each phase of the generator, to be mounted at the generator terminals.

2.17.1 Panelboards Panelboards shall be metal-enclosed, general purpose, 3-phase, 4-wire or 1-phase, 3-wire, 600 volt rated, with neutral bus and continuous ground bus, conforming to NEMA PB 1 and UL 891. Neutral bus and ground bus capacity shall be as shown. Enclosure designs, construction, materials and coatings shall be as indicated. Bus continuous current rating shall be as indicated. Current withstand rating (short circuit rating) shall match the generator capacity. Buses shall be copper.

2.17.2 Devices Switches, circuit breakers, switchgear, fuses, relays, and other protective devices shall be as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION.

2.18 SAFETY SYSTEM Devices, wiring, remote panels, local panels, etc., shall be provided and installed as a complete system to automatically activate the appropriate signals and initiate the appropriate actions. The safety system shall be provided with a self-test method to verify its operability. Alarm signals shall have manual acknowledgement and reset devices. The alarm signal systems shall reactivate for new signals after acknowledgment is given to any signal. The systems shall be configured so that loss of any monitoring device shall be dealt with as an alarm on that system element.

2.18.1 Audible Signal The audible alarm signal shall sound at a frequency of 70 Hz at a volume of 75 dB at 10 feet. The sound shall be continuously activated upon alarm and silenced upon acknowledgment. Signal devices shall be located as shown.

2.18.2 Visual Alarm Signal The visual alarm signal shall be a panel light. The light shall be normally off, activated to be blinking upon alarm. The light shall change to continuously light upon acknowledgement. If automatic shutdown occurs, the display shall maintain activated status to indicate the cause of failure and shall not be reset until cause of alarm has been cleared and/or restored to normal condition. Shutdown alarms shall be red; all other alarms shall be amber.

2.18.3 Alarms and Action Logic 2.18.3.1 Shutdown Simultaneous activation of the audible signal, activation of the visual signal, stopping the engine, and opening the generator main circuit breakers shall be accomplished.

2.18.3.2 Problem Activation of the visual signal shall be accomplished.


2.18.4 Local Alarm Panel A local alarm panel shall be provided with the following shutdown and alarm functions as indicated and including the listed Corps of Engineers requirements, mounted either on or adjacent to the engine generator set.

Device/ What/Where/Size NFPA 99 NFPA 110 NFPA 110 Corps of Condition/ Level 1 Level 2 Engrs Function Required Shutdowns W/Alarms High engine Automatic/ SD/CP VA SD/CP VA SD/CP VA SD VA temperature jacket water/ cylinder Low lube-oil Automatic/ SD/CP VA SD/CP VA SD/CP VA SD VA pressure pressure/ level Overspeed (110% (+ 2%) SD/CP VA SD/CP VA SD/CP VA SD VA shutdown $ of rated alarm speed Overcrank Automatic/ SD/CP VA SD/CP VA SD/CP VA failure Failure to to start to start Air shutdown When used SD/CP VA SD/CP VA damper (200-600kW) Day tank Automatic/Day SD/OPA overfill Tank/Level (Pump) limit indication & transfer pump shutdown (95 percent volume) Red emergency Manual Switch SD/CP VA SD/CP VA SD VA stop switch Failure to Corps of Engrs. crank Required Day tank or Corps of Engrs. Integral Main Required Fuel Tank low fuel limit Device/ Condition/ indication (70 percent volume


remaining) Alarms Low lube-oil Pressure/ CP VA CP VA CP VAO CP VA pressure level Low fuel Main tank, VA/AA CP VA CP VAO level 3 hours remaining High fuel Integral Main CP VA level Fuel Storage Tank 95 percent Volume Low coolant Jacket water CP/VA CP VA CP VA Pre-high Jacket water/ CP VA CP VA CP VAO CP VA temperature cylinder Pre-low CP VA CP VA lube-oil pressure High battery CP VA CP VAO voltage Low battery CP VA CP VAO voltage Battery AC supply not CP VA CP VAO charger available AC failure Control CP VA CP VAO switch not in AUTO Low starting CP VA CP VAO air pressure Low starting CP VA CP VAO hydraulic pressure SD - Shut Down CP - On Control Panel VA - Visual Alarm AA - Audible Alarm O - Optional 2.18.5 Time-Delay on Alarms For startup of the engine-generator set, time-delay devices shall be installed bypassing the low lubricating oil pressure alarm during cranking, and the coolant-fluid outlet temperature alarm. The lube-oil time-delay


device shall return its alarm to normal status after the engine starts. The coolant time-delay device shall return its alarm to normal status 5 minutes after the engine starts.

2.18.6 Remote Alarm Panel A remote alarm panel shall be provided as indicated.

Device/Condition/ What/Where/Size NFPA 99 NFPA 110 NFPA 110 Function Level 1 Level 2 Remote annunciator panel Battery powered Alarms Loads on genset VA Battery charger VA malfunction Low lube-oil Pressure/level VA/AA AA AAO Low Temperature Jacket water VA/AA AA AAO High Temperature Jacket water/ VA/AA AA AAO cylinder Low fuel level Main tank, 3 hr VA/AA AA AAO remaining Overcrank Failure to start VA/AA AA AAO Overspeed VA/AA AA AAO Pre-high temperature Jacket water/ AA cylinder Control switch not in AA AUTO Common alarm contacts X X for local & remote common alarm Audible alarm silencing X O switch Air shutdown damper When used AA AAO Common fault alarm AA X - Required SD - Shut Down CP - On Control Panel VA - Visual Alarm AA - Audible Alarm O - Optional


2.19 ENGINE GENERATOR SET CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION Devices, wiring, remote panels, local panels, etc., shall be provided and installed as a complete system to automatically activate the appropriate signals and initiate the appropriate actions.

2.19.1 Controls A local control panel shall be provided with controls as indicated and mounted as indicated.

Device/Condition/ Corps Requirement NFPA 110 NFPA 110 MFG Function Level 1 Level 2 Offering Controls Switch: run/start CP CP/STD - off/set - auto Emergency stop switch CP CP/STD & alarm Lamp test/indicator test CP CP VA CP VA CP/STD Common alarm contacts/ X X CP/O fault relay Panel lighting CP CP/STD Audible alarm & CP silencing/reset switch Voltage adjust for voltage CP CP/STD Regulator Pyrometer display CP w/selector switch Remote emergency stop switch CP VA CP VA Remote fuel shutoff switch Remote lube-oil shutoff switch 2.19.2 Engine Generator Set Metering and Status Indication A local panel shall be provided with devices as indicated and mounted as indicated.

Device/Condition/ Corps Requirement NFPA 110 NFPA 110 MFG Function Level 1 Level 2 Offering Genset Status & Metering Genset supplying load CP VA CP VAO CP VAO System ready CP/STD Engine oil pressure CP CP/STD Engine coolant temperature CP CP/STD Engine RPM (Tachometer) CP CP/STD


Engine run hours CP CP/STD Pyrometer display CP w/selector switch AC volts (generator), CP CP/STD 3-phase AC amps (generator), CP CP/STD 3-phase Generator frequency CP CP/STD Phase selector switches CP CP/STD (amps & volts) Watts/kW CP/VA-O Voltage Regulator Adjustment CP CP - On Control Panel VA - Visual Alarm AA - Audible Alarm O - Optional STD - Manufacturers Standard Offering 2.20 PANELS Each panel shall be of the type necessary to provide specified functions. Panels shall be mounted as shown. Instruments shall be mounted flush or semiflush. Convenient access to the back of instruments shall be provided to facilitate maintenance. Instruments shall be calibrated using recognized industry calibration standards. Each panel shall be provided with a panel identification plate which clearly identifies the panel function as indicated. Each instrument and device on the panel shall be provided with a plate which clearly identifies the device and its function as indicated. Panels except the remote alarm panel can be combined into a single panel.

2.20.1 Enclosures Enclosures shall be designed for the application and environment, conforming to NEMA ICS 6, and provided with locking mechanisms which are keyed alike.

2.20.2 Analog Analog electrical indicating instruments shall be in accordance with ANSI C39.1 with semiflush mounting. Switchgear, and control-room panel-mounted instruments shall have 250 degree scales with an accuracy of not less than 1 percent. Unit-mounted instruments shall be the manufacturer's standard with an accuracy of not less than 2 percent. The instrument's operating temperature range shall be minus 4 to plus 130 degrees F. Distorted generator output voltage waveform of a crest factor less than 5 shall not affect metering accuracy for phase voltages, hertz and amps.

2.20.3 Electronic


Electronic indicating instruments shall be true RMS indicating, 100 percent solid state, microprocessor controlled to provide all specified functions. Control, logic, and function devices shall be compatible as a system, sealed, dust and water tight, and shall utilize modular components with metal housings and digital instrumentation. An interface module shall be provided to decode serial link data from the electronic panel and translate alarm, fault and status conditions to set of relay contacts. Instrument accuracy shall be not less than 2 percent for unit mounted devices and 1 percent for control room, panel mounted devices, throughout a temperature range of minus 4 to plus 130 degrees F. Data display shall utilize LED or back lit LCD. Additionally, the display shall provide indication of cycle programming and diagnostic codes for troubleshooting. Numeral height shall be 1/2 inch.

2.20.4 Parameter Display Indication or readouts of the lubricating-oil pressure, ac voltmeter, ac ammeter, frequency meter, and coolant temperature.

2.20.5 Exerciser The exerciser shall be in accordance with Section 26 36 00.00 10 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND BY-PASS/ISOLATION SWITCH.

2.21 SURGE PROTECTION Electrical and electronic components shall be protected from, or designed to withstand the effects of surges from switching and lightning.

2.22 AUTOMATIC ENGINE-GENERATOR-SET SYSTEM OPERATION Fully automatic operation shall be provided for the following operations: engine-generator set starting and source transfer upon loss of normal source; retransfer upon restoration of the normal source; sequential starting; and stopping of each engine-generator set after cool down. Devices shall automatically reset after termination of their function.

2.22.1 Automatic Transfer Switch Automatic transfer switches shall be in accordance with Section 26 36 00.00 10 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND BY-PASS/ISOLATION SWITCH.

2.22.2 Monitoring and Transfer Devices shall be provided to monitor voltage and frequency for the normal power source and each engine generator set, and control transfer from the normal source and retransfer upon restoration of the normal source. Functions, actuation, and time delays shall be as described in Section 26 36 00.00 10 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND BY-PASS/ISOLATION SWITCH.

2.23 MANUAL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET SYSTEM OPERATION Complete facilities shall be provided for manual starting and testing of each set without load, loading and unloading of each set.

2.24 BASE


The base shall be constructed of steel. The base shall be designed to rigidly support the engine-generator set, ensure permanent alignment of all rotating parts, be arranged to provide easy access to allow changing of lube-oil, and ensure that alignment will be maintained during shipping and normal operation. The base shall permit skidding in any direction during installation and shall be provided with suitable holes for foundation bolts. The base shall also withstand and mitigate the effects of synchronous vibration of the engine and generator, and shall be provided with suitable holes for anchor bolts and jacking screws for leveling.

2.25 THERMAL INSULATION Thermal insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

2.26 PAINTING AND FINISHING The engine-generator set shall be cleaned, primed and painted in accordance with the manufacturer's standard color and practice.

2.27 FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTS Perform factory inspection and tests on each engine-generator set proposed to meet this specification section. Inspections shall be completed and necessary repairs made prior to testing. Inspectors shall look for leaks, looseness, defects in components, and proper assembly. Factory tests shall be NEMA MG 1 routine tests and the manufacturers routine tests.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION After becoming familiar with all details of the work, perform a Site Visit to verify details of the work. Advise the Contracting Officer in writing of any discrepancies before performing any work.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION Installation shall provide clear space for operation and maintenance in accordance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2. Installation of pipe, duct, conduit, and ancillary equipment shall be configured to facilitate easy removal and replacement of major components and parts of the engine-generator set.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION 3.3.1 General Piping shall be welded. Connections at valves shall be flanged. Connections at equipment shall be flanged except that connections to the diesel engine may be threaded if the diesel-engine manufacturer's standard connection is threaded. Except as otherwise specified, flanged fittings shall be utilized to allow for complete dismantling and removal of each piping system from the facility without disconnecting or removing any portion of any other system's equipment or piping. Connections to all equipment shall be made with flexible connectors. Pipes extending through the roof shall be properly flashed. Piping shall be installed clear of windows, doors, and openings to permit thermal expansion and contraction


without damage to joints or hangers, and with a 1/2 inch drain valve at each low point.

3.3.2 Supports Hangers, inserts, and supports shall be of sufficient size to accommodate any insulation and shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Supports shall be spaced not more than 7 feet on center for pipes 2 inches in diameter or less, not more than 12 feet on center for pipes larger than 2 inches but no larger than 4 inches, and not more than 17 feet on center for pipes larger than 4 inches in diameter. Supports shall be provided at pipe bends or change of direction.

3.3.2.1 Ceiling and Roof Exhaust piping shall be supported with appropriately sized type 41 single pipe roll and threaded rods; all other piping shall be supported with appropriately sized type 1 clevis and threaded rods.

3.3.2.2 Wall Wall supports for pipe shall be made by suspending the pipe from appropriately sized type 33 brackets with the appropriate ceiling and roof pipe supports.

3.3.3 Flanged Joints Flanges shall be 125 pound type, drilled, and of the proper size and configuration to match equipment and diesel-engine connections. Gaskets shall be factory cut in one piece 1/16 inch thick.

3.3.4 Cleaning After fabrication and before assembly, piping interiors shall be manually wiped clean of all debris.

3.3.5 Pipe Sleeves Pipes passing through construction such as ceilings, floors, or walls shall be fitted with sleeves. Each sleeve shall extend through and be securely fastened in its respective structure and shall be cut flush with each surface. The structure shall be built tightly to the sleeve. The inside diameter of each sleeve shall be 1/2 inch, and where pipes pass through combustible materials, 1 inch larger than the outside diameter of the passing pipe or pipe covering.

3.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Electrical installation shall comply with NFPA 70, IEEE C2, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. For vibration isolation, flexible fittings shall be provided for all conduit, cable trays, and raceways attached to engine-generator sets; metallic conductor cables installed on the engine generator set and from the engine generator set to equipment not mounted on the engine generator set shall be flexible stranded conductor; and terminations of conductors on the engine generator set shall be crimp-type terminals or lugs. Submit proof of prototype tests as specified in the Submittals paragraph.


3.5 FIELD PAINTING Field painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.6 ONSITE INSPECTION AND TESTS 3.6.1 Test Conditions 3.6.1.1 Data Measurements shall be made and recorded of parameters necessary to verify that each set meets specified parameters. If the results of any test step are not satisfactory, adjustments or replacements shall be made and the step repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. Unless otherwise indicated, data shall be taken during engine-generator set operation and recorded in 15 minute intervals and shall include: readings of engine-generator set meters and gauges for electrical and power parameters; oil pressure; ambient temperature; and engine temperatures available from meters and gauges supplied as permanent equipment on the engine-generator set. In the following tests where measurements are to be recorded after stabilization of an engine-generator set parameter (voltage, frequency, current, temperature, etc.), stabilization is considered to have occurred when measurements are maintained within the specified bandwidths or tolerances, for a minimum of four consecutive readings. Electrical measurements shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Std 120. Definitions and terms are in accordance with IEEE Std 100. Temperature limits in the rating of electrical equipment and for the evaluation of electrical insulation shall be in accordance with IEEE Std 1.

3.6.1.2 Power Factor Engine-generator set operating tests shall be made utilizing a load with the power factor specified in the engine generator set parameter schedule.

3.6.1.3 Contractor Supplied Items Provide all equipment and supplies required for inspections and tests including fuel, test instruments, and loadbanks at the specified power factors.

3.6.1.4 Instruments Readings of panel gauges, meters, displays, and instruments, provided under this specification shall be verified during test runs by test instruments of precision and accuracy greater than the tested items. Test instrument accuracy shall be at least as follows: current, 1.5 percent; voltage, 1.5 percent; real power, 1.5 percent; reactive power, 1.5 percent; power factor, 3 percent; frequency, 0.5 percent. Test instruments shall be calibrated by a recognized standards laboratory within 30 days prior to testing.

3.6.1.5 Sequence The sequence of testing shall be as specified in the approved testing plan unless variance in authorized by the Contracting Officer. Field testing shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Tests may be


scheduled and sequenced in order to optimize run-time periods; however the following general order of testing shall be followed: Construction Tests; Inspections; Safety run Tests; and Performance Tests and Final Inspection.

3.6.2 Construction Tests Individual component and equipment functional tests for fuel piping, coolant piping, and lubricating-oil piping, electrical circuit continuity, insulation resistance, circuit protective devices, and equipment not provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer shall be performed prior to connection to the engine-generator set.

3.6.2.1 Piping Test

a. Lube-oil and fuel-oil piping shall be flushed with the same type of fluid intended to flow through the piping, until the outflowing fluid has no obvious sediment or emulsion.

b. Fuel piping which is external to the engine-generator set shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 30. All remaining piping which is external to the engine generator set shall be pressure tested with air pressure at 150 percent of the maximum anticipated working pressure, but in no case less than 150 psig, for a period of 2 hours to prove the piping has no leaks. If piping is to be insulated, the test shall be performed before the insulation is applied.

3.6.2.2 Electrical Equipment Tests

a. Low-voltage cable insulation integrity tests shall be performed for cables connecting the generator breaker to the automatic transfer switch and as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Low-voltage cable, complete with splices, shall be tested for insulation resistance after the cables are installed, in their final configuration, ready for connection to the equipment, and prior to energization. The test voltage shall be 500 volts dc, applied for one minute between each conductor and ground and between all possible combinations conductors in the same trench, duct, or cable, with all other conductors in the same trench, duct, or conduit. The minimum value of insulation shall be:

1) R in megohms = (rated voltage in kV + 1) x 304,800/(length of cable in meters).

2) (R in megohms = (rated voltage in kV + 1) x 1000/(length of cable in feet)

3) Each cable failing this test shall be repaired or replaced. The repaired cable shall be retested until failures have been eliminated.

b. Medium-voltage cable insulation integrity tests shall be performed for cables connecting the generator breaker to the generator switchgear. After insulation and before the operating test or connection to an existing system, the medium-voltage cable system shall be given a high potential test. Direct-current voltage shall be applied on each phase conductor of the system by connecting conductors as one terminal and connecting grounds or metallic shieldings or


sheaths of the cable as the other terminal for each test. Prior to making the test, the cables shall be isolated by opening applicable protective devices and disconnecting equipment. The test shall be conducted with all splices, connectors, and terminations in place. The method, voltage, length of time, and other characteristics of the test for initial installation shall be in accordance with NEMA WC 74 for the particular type of cable installed, except that 28kV and 35kV insulation test voltages shall be in accordance with either AEIC CS8 or AEIC CS8 as applicable, and shall not exceed the recommendations of IEEE Std 404 for cable joints and IEEE Std 48 for cable terminations unless the cable and accessory manufacturers indicate higher voltages are acceptable for testing. Should any cable fail due to a weakness of conductor insulation or due to defects or injuries incidental to the installation or because of improper installation of cable, cable joints, terminations, or other connections, make necessary repairs or replace cables as directed. Repaired or replaced cables shall be retested.

c. Ground-Resistance Tests. The resistance of each grounding electrode shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method defined in IEEE Std 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

1) Single rod electrode - 25 ohms. 2) Multiple rod electrodes - 15 ohms.

d. Circuit breakers and switchgear shall be examined and tested in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions for functional testing.

3.6.3 Inspections The following inspections shall be performed jointly by the Contracting Officer and the Contractor, after complete installation of each engine-generator set and its associated equipment, and prior to startup of the engine-generator set. Checks applicable to the installation shall be performed. The results of those which are physical inspections (I) shall be documented and submitted in accordance with paragraph SUBMITTALS. Present manufacturer's data for the inspections designated (D) at the time of inspection. Inspections shall verify that equipment type, features, accessibility, installation and condition are in accordance with the contract specification. Manufacturer's statements shall certify provision of features which cannot be verified visually.

1. Drive belts. (I) 2. Governor type and features. (I) 3. Engine timing mark. (I) 4. Starting motor. (I) 5. Starting aids. (I) 6. Coolant type and concentration. (D) 7. Radiator drains. (I) 8. Block coolant drains. (I)


9. Coolant fill level. (I) 10. Coolant line connections. (I) 11. Coolant hoses. (I) 12. Combustion air filter. (I) 13. Intake air silencer. (I) 14. Lube oil type. (D) 15. Lube oil drain. (I) 16. Lube-oil filter. (I) 17. Lube-oil-fill level. (I) 18. Lube-oil line connections. (I) 19. Lube-oil lines. (I) 20. Fuel type. (D) 21. Fuel-level. (I) 22. Fuel-line connections. (I) 23. Fuel lines. (I) 24. Fuel filter. (I) 25. Access for maintenance. (I) 26. Voltage regulator. (I) 27. Battery-charger connections. (I) 28. Wiring & terminations. (I) 29. Instrumentation. (I) 30. Hazards to personnel. (I) 31. Base. (I) 32. Nameplates. (I) 33. Paint. (I) 34. Exhaust system. (I) 35. Access provided to controls. (I) 36. Enclosure. (I) 37. Engine & generator mounting bolts (proper application). (I)

3.6.4 Safety Run Tests

a. Perform and record engine manufacturer's recommended prestarting checks and inspections.

b. Start the engine, record the starting time, make and record engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections during a reasonable warm-up period.

c. Activate the manual emergency stop switch and verify that the engine stops.

d. Remove the high and pre-high lubricating oil temperature sensing elements from the engine and temporarily install temperature gauge in their normal locations on the engine (required for safety, not for recorded data). Where necessary, provide temporary wiring harness to connect the sensing elements to their permanent electrical leads.

e. Start the engine, record the starting time, make and record engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections and operate the engine generator-set at no load until the output voltage and frequency stabilize. Monitor the temporarily installed temperature gauges. If temperature reading exceeds the value for an alarm condition, activate the manual emergency stop switch.

f. Immerse the elements in a vessel containing controlled-temperature hot oil and record the temperature at which the pre-high alarm


activates and the temperature at which the engine shuts down. Remove the temporary temperature gauges and reinstall the temperature sensors on the engine.

g. Remove the high and pre-high coolant temperature sensing elements from the engine and temporarily seal their normal location on the engine and temporarily install temperature gauges in their normal locations on the engine (required for safety, not for recorded data). Where necessary provide temporary wiring harness to connect the sensing elements to their permanent electrical leads.

h. Start the engine, record the starting time, make and record engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections and operate the engine generator-set at no load until the output voltage and frequency stabilize.

i. Immerse the elements in a vessel containing controlled-temperature hot oil and record the temperature at which the pre-high alarm activates and the temperature at which the engine shuts down. Remove the temporary temperature gauges and reinstall the temperature sensors on the engine.

j. Start the engine, record the starting time, make and record engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections during a reasonable warm-up period.

k. Operate the engine generator-set for at least 30 minutes at 100 percent of service load.

l. Verify proper operation of the governor and voltage regulator.

m. Verify proper operation and setpoints of gauges and instruments.

n. Verify proper operation of ancillary equipment.

o. Manually adjust the governor to increase engine speed past the overspeed limit. Record the RPM at which the engine shuts down.

p. Start the engine, record the starting time, make and record engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections and operate the engine generator-set for at least 15 minutes at 75 percent of rated load.

q. Manually fill the day tank to a level above the overfill limit. Record the level at which the overfill alarm sounds. Verify shutdown of the fuel transfer pump. Drain the day tank down below the overfill limit.

r. Shut down the engine. Remove the time-delay low lube oil pressure alarm bypass and try to start the engine. Record the results.

s. Attach a manifold to the engine oil system (at the oil sensor pressure port) that contains a shutoff valve in series with a connection for the engine's oil pressure sensor followed by an oil pressure gauge ending with a bleed valve. The engine's oil pressure sensor shall be moved from the engine to the manifold and its normal


location on the engine temporarily sealed. The manifold shutoff valve shall be open and bleed valve closed.

t. Start the engine, record the starting time, make and record all engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections and operate the engine generator-set for at least 15 minutes at 75 percent of service load.

u. Close the manifold shutoff valve. Slowly allow the pressure in the manifold to bleed off through the bleed valve while watching the pressure gauge. Record the pressure at which the engine shuts down. Catch oil spillage from the bleed valve in a container. Add the oil from the container back to the engine, remove the manifold, and reinstall the engine's oil pressure sensor on the engine.

v. Start the engine, record the starting time, make and record all engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections and operate the engine generator-set for at least 15 minutes at 100 percent of service load. Record the maximum sound level in each frequency band at a distance of 75 feet from the end of the exhaust and air intake piping directly along the path of intake and discharge horizontal piping; or at a radius of 75 feet from the engine at 45 degrees apart in all directions for vertical piping. The measurements should comply with the paragraph SOUND LIMITATIONS. If a sound limiting enclosure is provided, the enclosure, the muffler, and intake silencer shall be modified or replaced as required to meet the sound requirements contained within this specification. If a sound limiting enclosure is not provided, the muffler and air intake silencer shall be modified or replaced as required to meet the sound limitations of this specification. If the sound limitations can not be obtained by modifying or replacing the muffler and air intact silencer, notify the Contracting Officer and provide a recommendation for meeting the sound limitations.

w. Manually drain off fuel slowly from the day tank to empty it to below the low fuel level limit and record the level at which the audible alarm sounds. Add fuel back to the day tank to fill it above low level alarm limits.

3.6.5 Performance Tests 3.6.5.1 Continuous Engine Load Run Test The engine-generator set and ancillary systems shall be tested at service load to: demonstrate reliability and durability; verify that heat of extended operation does not adversely affect or cause failure in any part of the system; and check all parts of the system. If the engine load run test is interrupted for any reason, the entire test shall be repeated. The engine load run test shall be accomplished principally during daylight hours. After each change in load in the following test, measure the vibration at the end bearings (front and back of engine, outboard end of generator) in the horizontal, vertical, and axial directions. Verify that the vibration is within the allowable range. Measurements are to be recorded after stabilization of an engine-generator set parameter (voltage, frequency, current, temperature, etc.). Stabilization is considered to have occurred when measurements are maintained within the specified bandwidths or


tolerances, for a minimum of four consecutive readings. Data taken at 15 minutes intervals shall include the following:

a. Electrical: Output amperes, voltage, real and reactive power, power factor, frequency.

b. Pressure: Lube-oil.

c. Temperature: Coolant, Lube-oil, Ambient.

(1) Perform and record engine manufacturer's recommended prestarting checks and inspections. Include as a minimum checking of coolant fluid, fuel, and lube-oil levels.

(2) Start the engine; make and record engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections during a reasonable warm-up period.

(3) Operate the engine generator-set for at least 2 hours at 75 percent of service load.

(4) Increase load to 100 percent of service load and operate the engine generator-set for at least 2 hours.

(5) Remove load from the engine-generator set.

3.6.5.2 Load Acceptance Test Engine manufacturer's recommended prestarting checks and inspections shall be performed and recorded. The engine shall be started, and engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections made and recorded during a reasonable warm-up period. For the following steps, the output line-line and line-neutral voltages and frequency shall be recorded after performing each step instruction (after stabilization of voltage and frequency). Stabilization is considered to have occurred when measurements are maintained within the specified bandwidths or tolerances, for a minimum of four consecutive readings.

a. Apply load in steps no larger than the Maximum Step Load Increase to load the engine-generator set to 100 of Service Load.

b. Verify that the engine-generator set responds to the load addition and that the output voltage returns to and stabilizes within the rated bandwidths.

3.6.6 Automatic Operation Tests for Stand-Alone Operation The automatic loading system shall be tested to demonstrate automatic starting and loading and unloading of each engine-generator set. The loads for this test shall utilize the actual loads to be served, and the loading sequence shall be the indicated sequence. Perform this test for a minimum of two successive, successful tests. Data taken shall include the following:

a. Ambient temperature (at 15 minute intervals).

b. Generator output current (before and after load changes).


c. Generator output voltage (before and after load changes).

d. Generator output frequency (before and after load changes.)

1. Initiate loss of the primary power source and verify automatic sequence of operation.

2. Restore the primary power source and verify sequence of operation.

3. Verify resetting of controls to normal.

3.7 ONSITE TRAINING Conduct training course for operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 4 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance. The course instructions shall cover pertinent points involved in operating, starting, stopping, servicing the equipment, as well as all major elements of the operation and maintenance manuals. Additionally, the course instructions shall demonstrate all routine maintenance operations such as oil change, oil filter change, and air filter change.

3.8 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING

a. Start the engine, record the starting time, make and record all engine manufacturer's after-starting checks and inspections during a reasonable warm-up period.

b. Increase the load in steps no greater than the maximum step load increase to 100 percent of service load, and operate the engine-generator set for at least 30 minutes. Measure the vibration at the end bearings (front and back of engine, outboard end of generator) in the horizontal, vertical, and axial directions. Verify that the vibration is within the same range as previous measurements and is within the required range.

c. Remove load and shut down the engine-generator set after the recommended cool down period. Perform the pre-test inspections and take necessary corrective actions.

d. Remove the lube oil filter and have the oil and filter examined by the engine manufacturer for excessive metal, abrasive foreign particles, etc. Any corrective action shall be verified for effectiveness by running the engine for 4 hours at service load, then re-examining the oil and filter.

e. Remove the fuel filter and examine the filter for trash, abrasive foreign particles, etc.

f. Visually inspect and check engine and generator mounting bolts for tightness and visible damage.

g. Replace air, oil, and fuel filters with new filters.


3.9 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE The engine generator-set manufacturer shall furnish a qualified representative to supervise the installation of the engine generator-set, assist in the performance of the onsite tests, and instruct personnel as to the operational and maintenance features of the equipment.

3.10 INSTRUCTIONS Two sets of instructions shall be typed in 8 1/2 x 11 inches format, laminated in weatherproof plastic, and placed in three-ring vinyl binders. The binders shall be placed as directed by the Contracting Officer. The instructions shall be in place prior to acceptance of the engine generator set installation. First set of instructions shall include a one-line diagram, wiring and control diagrams and a complete layout of the system. Second set of instructions shall include the condensed operating instructions describing manufacturer's pre-start checklist and precautions; startup procedures for test-mode, manual-start mode, and automatic-start mode (as applicable); running checks, procedures, and precautions; and shutdown procedures, checks, and precautions. Instructions shall include procedures for interrelated equipment (such as heat recovery systems, co-generation, load-shedding, and automatic transfer switches).

3.11 ACCEPTANCE Final acceptance of the engine-generator set will not be given until the Contractor has successfully completed all tests and after all defects in installation material or operation have been corrected.




SECTION 26 36 00.00 10

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND BY-PASS/ISOLATION SWITCH PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM B 117 (2007a) Standing Practice for Operating Salt

Spray (Fog) Apparatus

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C37.13 (1990; R 1995) Standard for Low-Voltage AC

Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures IEEE C37.90.1 (2002; Errata 2003) Surge Withstand

Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002) IEEE Guide on the Surges Environment




IEEE Std 602 (2007) Recommended Practice for Electric

Systems in Health Care Facilities - White Book




NEMA ICS 10 Part 2 (2005) Industrial Control and Systems Part 2:

Static AC Transfer Equipment NEMA ICS 2 (2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006)



NEMA ICS 4 (2005) Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks


Controls and Systems Enclosures

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 110 (2005) Standard for Emergency and Standby

Power Systems NFPA 70 (2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code -

2008 Edition

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1008 (1996; Rev thru Dec 2007) Standard for

Transfer Switch Equipment UL 1066 (1997; Rev thru Oct 2006) Low-Voltage AC and

DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures 1.2 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings

Schematic, external connection, one-line schematic and wiring diagram of each ATS assembly.

Equipment Installation

Dimensioned plans, sections and elevations showing minimum clearances, weights, and conduit entry provisions for each ATS.

SD-03 Product Data

Material Equipment

List of proposed equipment and material, containing a description of each separate item.

SD-06 Test Reports

Testing; G

A description of proposed field test procedures, including proposed date and steps describing each test, its duration and


expected results, not less than two weeks prior to test date. Certified factory and field test reports, within 14 days following completion of tests. Reports shall be certified and dated and shall demonstrate that tests were successfully completed prior to shipment of equipment.

SD-07 Certificates

Equipment Material

Certificates of compliance showing evidence of UL listing and conformance with applicable NEMA standards. Such certificates are not required if manufacturer's published data, submitted and approved, reflect UL listing or conformance with applicable NEMA standards.

Switching Equipment

Evidence that ATS withstand current rating (WCR) has been coordinated with upstream protective devices as required by UL 1008.


Switching Equipment Instructions

Two complete hard copies and one electronic copy in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format on CD or DVD of operating manuals and maintenance manuals listing routine maintenance, possible breakdowns, repairs, and troubleshooting guide.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Detail Drawings Submit interface equipment connection diagram showing conduit and wiring between ATS and related equipment. Device, nameplate, and item numbers shown in list of equipment and material shall appear on drawings wherever that item appears. Diagrams shall show interlocking provisions and cautionary notes, if any. Operating instructions shall be shown either on one-line diagram or separately. Unless otherwise approved, one-line and elementary or schematic diagrams shall appear on same drawing.

1.3.2 Switching Equipment Upon request, manufacturer shall provide notarized letter certifying compliance with requirements of this specification, including withstand current rating (WCR). Submit an operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures for system startup, operation, and shutdown. Manual shall include manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of equipment and basic operating features. Manufacturer's spare parts data shall be included with supply source and current cost of recommended spare parts. Manual shall include simplified wiring and control diagrams for system as installed.


1.4 SITE CONDITIONS Seismic requirements shall be as specified in UFC 3-310-04 SEISMIC DESIGN FOR BUILDINGS and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT, 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT and 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS Provide material and equipment which are standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing the products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. The experience use shall include applications in similar circumstances and of same design and rating as specified ATS. Equipment shall be capable of being serviced by a manufacturer-authorized and trained organization that is, in the Contracting Officer's opinion, reasonably convenient to the site.

2.2 NAMEPLATE Nameplate showing manufacturer's name and equipment ratings shall be made of corrosion-resistant material with not less than 1/8 inch tall characters. Nameplate shall be mounted to front of enclosure and shall comply with nameplate requirements of NEMA ICS 2.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS) ATS shall be electrically operated and mechanically held in both operating positions. ATS shall be suitable for use in emergency systems or standby systems as stated in the Delivery or Task Order and as described in NFPA 70. ATS shall be UL listed. ATS shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with applicable requirements of IEEE C37.90.1, IEEE C37.13, IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Std 602, NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 10 Part 2, UL 1008 and UL 1066. ATS shall conform to NFPA 110. To facilitate maintenance, manufacturer's instruction manual shall provide typical maximum contact voltage drop readings under specified conditions for use during periodic maintenance. Manufacturer shall provide instructions for determination of contact integrity. ATS shall be rated for continuous duty at specified continuous current rating. ATS shall be fully compatible and approved for use with BP/IS specified. BP/IS shall be considered part of ATS system. ATS shall have the following characteristics as stated in the Delivery or Task Order:

a. Voltage: As stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

b. Number of Phases: As stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

c. Number of Wires: As stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

d. Frequency: 60 or 400 Hz as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

e. Poles: As stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

f. ATS WCR: Rated to withstand short-circuit current in amperes, RMS symmetrical, as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.


g. Nonwelding Contacts: Rated for nonwelding of contacts when used with upstream feeder overcurrent devices shown and with available fault current specified.

h. Main and Neutral Contacts: Contacts shall have silver alloy composition. Neutral contact continuous current rating shall be not less than twice the rating of main or phase contacts.

2.3.1 Override Time Delay Provide adjustable time delay to override monitored source deviation from 0.5 to 6 seconds and factory set at 1 second. ATS shall monitor phase conductors to detect and respond to sustained voltage drop of 25 percent of nominal between any two preferred source conductors and initiate transfer action to alternate source and start engine driven generator after set time period. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal and factory set at 90 percent. Dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value and factory set at 85 percent of nominal.

2.3.2 Transfer Time Delay Time delay before transfer to alternate power source shall be adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes and factory set at 0 minutes. ATS shall monitor frequency and voltage of alternate power source and transfer when frequency and voltage are stabilized. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal and factory set at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal and factory set at 90 percent.

2.3.3 Return Time Delay Time delay before return transfer to preferred power source shall be adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and factory set at 30 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically defeated upon loss or sustained undervoltage of alternate power source, provided that preferred supply has been restored.

2.3.4 Engine Shutdown Time Delay Time delay shall be adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and shall be factory set at 10 minutes.

2.3.5 Exerciser Provide a generator exerciser timer. Run times shall be user programmable. The generator exerciser shall be selectable between load transfer and engineer run only, and shall have a fail-safe feature that will retransfer the ATS to preferred during the exercise period.

2.3.6 Auxiliary Contacts Two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts shall operate when ATS is connected to preferred power source, and two normally open and two normally closed contacts shall operate when ATS is connected to alternate source.


2.3.7 Supplemental Features ATS shall be furnished with the following:

a. Engine start contact.

b. Alternate source monitor.

c. Test switch to simulate normal power outage.

d. Voltage sensing. Pickup voltage adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal; dropout adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup.

e. Time delay bypass switch to override return time delay to normal.

f. Manual return-to-normal switch.

g. Means shall be provided in the ATS to insure that motor/transformer load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. This shall be accomplished with either in-phase monitoring, time-delay transition, or load voltage decay sensing methods. If manufacturer supplies an in-phase monitoring system, the manufacturer shall indicate under what conditions a transfer cannot be accomplished. If the manufacturer supplies a time-delay transition system, the manufacturer shall supply recommendations for establishing time delay. If load voltage decay sensing is supplied, the load voltage setting shall be user programmable.

2.3.8 Operator Manual operator conforming to UL 1008 shall be provided, and shall incorporate features to prevent operation by unauthorized personnel. ATS shall be designed for safe manual operation under full load conditions. If manual operation is accomplished by opening the door, then a dead-front shall be supplied for operator safety.

2.3.9 Override Switch Override switch shall bypass automatic transfer controls so ATS will transfer and remain connected to alternate power source, regardless of condition of preferred source. If the alternate source fails and the preferred source is available, ATS shall automatically retransfer to the preferred source.

2.3.10 Green Indicating Light A green indicating light shall supervise/provide preferred power source switch position indication and shall have a nameplate engraved PREFERRED.

2.3.11 Red Indicating Light A red indicating light shall supervise/provide alternate power source switch position indication and shall have a nameplate engraved ALTERNATE.

2.4 BY-PASS/ISOLATION SWITCH (BP/IS)


2.4.1 Design Bypass/isolation switch (BP/IS) shall permit load by-pass to either preferred or alternate power source and complete isolation of associated ATS, independent of ATS operating position. BP/IS and associated ATS shall be products of same manufacturer and shall be completely interconnected and tested at factory and at project site as specified. BP/IS shall be manufactured, listed, and tested in accordance with paragraph AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS) and shall have electrical ratings that exceed or equal comparable ratings specified for ATS. Operating handles shall be externally operated and arranged so that one person can perform the bypass and isolation functions through the operation of a maximum of two handles within 5 seconds. The ATS shall have provisions for locking in the isolation position. Handle for manual operation shall be permanently attached to operating mechanism. BP/IS operation shall be accomplished without disconnecting switch load terminal conductors. Isolation handle positions shall be marked with engraved plates or other approved means to indicate position or operating condition of associated ATS, as follows:

a. Indication shall be provided to show that ATS section is providing power to the load.

b. Indication shall be provided of ATS isolation. The ATS controls shall remain functional with the ATS isolated or in bypass mode to permit monitoring of the preferred power source and automatic starting of the generator in the event of a loss of the preferred power source. In the isolated mode, the bypass section shall be capable of functioning as a manual transfer switch to transfer the load to either power source. The ATS shall be capable of undergoing functional operation testing without service interruption. The ATS may also be completely removed from the enclosure, if required for maintenance or repair, while the bypass section continues to power the load.

2.4.2 Switch Construction Bypass/isolation switch shall be constructed for convenient removal of parts from front of switch enclosure without removal of other parts or disconnection of external power conductors. Contacts shall be as specified for associated ATS, including provisions for inspection of contacts without disassembly of BP/IS or removal of entire contact enclosure. To facilitate maintenance, manufacturer shall provide instructions for determination of contact integrity. BP/IS and associated ATS shall be interconnected with suitably sized copper bus bars silver-plated at each connection point, and braced to withstand magnetic and thermal forces created at WCR specified for associated ATS.

2.5 ENCLOSURE ATS and accessories shall be installed in a smooth sheet metal enclosure, NEMA ICS 6, Type as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, constructed in accordance with applicable requirements of UL 1066 and/or UL 1008. Intake vent shall be screened and filtered. Exhaust vent shall be screened. Metal gauge shall be not less than No. 14. Enclosure shall be equipped with at least two approved grounding lugs for grounding enclosure to facility ground system using No. 4 AWG copper conductors. Factory wiring within enclosure and field wiring terminating within enclosure shall comply with NFPA 70. If wiring is not color coded, wire shall be permanently tagged or marked near


terminal at each end with wire number shown on approved detail drawing. Terminal block shall conform to NEMA ICS 4. Terminals shall be arranged for entrance of external conductors from top or bottom of enclosure as shown. Main switch terminals, including neutral terminal if used, shall be pressure type suitable for termination of external conductors shown.

2.5.1 Construction Enclosure shall be constructed for ease of removal and replacement of ATS components and control devices from front without disconnection of external power conductors or removal or disassembly of major components. Enclosure of ATS with BP/IS shall be constructed to protect personnel from energized BP/IS components during ATS maintenance.

2.5.2 Cleaning and Painting Both the inside and outside surfaces of an enclosure, including means for fastening, shall be protected against corrosion by enameling, galvanizing, plating, powder coating, or other equivalent means. Protection is not required for metal parts that are inherently resistant to corrosion, bearings, sliding surfaces of hinges, or other parts where such protection is impractical. Finish shall be manufacturer's standard material, process, and color and shall be free from runs, sags, peeling, or other defects. An enclosure marked Type 1, 3R, 4 or 12 shall be acceptable if there is no visible rust at the conclusion of a salt spray (fog) test using the test method in ASTM B 117, employing a 5 percent by weight, salt solution for 24 hours. Type 4X enclosures are acceptable following performance of the above test with an exposure time of 200 hours.

2.6 TESTING 2.6.1 Factory Testing A prototype of specified ATS shall be factory tested in accordance with UL 1008. In addition, factory tests shall be performed on each ATS as follows:

a. Insulation resistance test to ensure integrity and continuity of entire system.

b. Main switch contact resistance test.

c. Visual inspection to verify that each ATS is as specified.

d. Mechanical test to verify that ATS sections are free of mechanical hindrances.

e. Electrical tests to verify complete system electrical operation and to set up time delays and voltage sensing settings.

2.6.2 Factory Test Reports Manufacturer shall provide three certified copies of factory test reports.

2.7 FACTORY TESTING (MEDICAL FACILITIES) The factory tests for ATS and By-Pass/Isolation switches used in medical facilities shall be conducted in the following sequence:


a. General b. Normal c. Overvoltage d. Undervoltage e. Overload f. Endurance g. Temperature Rise h. Dielectric Voltage-Withstand i. Contact Opening j. Dielectric Voltage-Withstand (Repeated) k. Withstand l. Instrumentation and Calibration of High Capacity m. Closing n. Dielectric Voltage-Withstand (Repeated) o. Strength of Insulating Base and Support

2.7.1 Viewing Ports ATS and BP/IS switches shall be of draw-out construction. Viewing ports to inspect the contacts without requiring disassembly shall be provided.

2.7.2 Operating Handles The operating handles shall be externally operated, and designed and constructed not to stop in an intermediate or neutral position during operation, but shall permit load by-pass and transfer switch isolation in no more than two manual operations which can be performed by one person in 5 seconds or less. The transfer speed will be independent of the operational speed of the switch handle or handles.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ATS shall be installed as shown and in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 INSTRUCTIONS Manufacturer's approved operating instructions shall be permanently secured to cabinet where operator can see them. One-line and elementary or schematic diagram shall be permanently secured to inside of front enclosure door.

3.3 SITE TESTING Following completion of ATS installation and after making proper adjustments and settings, site tests shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to demonstrate that each ATS functions satisfactorily and as specified. Advise Contracting Officer not less than 5 working days prior to scheduled date for site testing, and provide certified field test reports within 2 calendar weeks following successful completion of site tests. Test reports shall describe adjustments and settings made and site tests performed. Minimum operational tests shall include the following:


a. Insulation resistance shall be tested, both phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.

b. Power failure of normal source shall be simulated by opening upstream protective device. This test shall be performed a minimum of five times.

c. Power failure of emergency source with normal source available shall be simulated by opening upstream protective device for emergency source. This test shall be performed a minimum of five times.

d. Low phase-to-ground voltage shall be simulated for each phase of normal source.

e. Operation and settings shall be verified for specified ATS features, such as override time delay, transfer time delay, return time delay, engine shutdown time delay, exerciser, auxiliary contacts, and supplemental features.

f. Manual and automatic ATS and BP/IS functions shall be verified.




SECTION 26 41 01.00 10

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.


IEEE C135.30 (1988) Zinc-Coated Ferrous Ground Rods for

Overhead or Underground Line Construction


2008 Edition NFPA 780 (2007) Standard for the Installation of

Lightning Protection Systems

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 467 (2007) Standard for Grounding and Bonding

Equipment UL 96 (2005) Standard for Lightning Protection

Components UL 96A (2007) Standard for Installation Requirements

for Lightning Protection Systems UL Electrical Construction (2008) Electrical Construction Equipment

Directory 1.2 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings

Detail drawings, as specified.

SD-07 Certificates


Materials

Proof of compliance with requirements of UL, where material or equipment is specified to comply. The label of or listing in UL Electrical Construction will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, a written certificate from an approved nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of Underwriters Laboratories may be submitted. Submit a letter of findings certifying UL inspection of facility lightning protection systems provided.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, drawings, and installation instructions. Detail drawings shall demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and mounting and relationship to other parts of the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS Proide a system consisting of the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and which is the manufacturer's latest UL approved design. The lightning protection system shall conform to NFPA 70 and NFPA 780, UL 96 and UL 96A, except where requirements in excess thereof are specified herein.

2.2 MATERIALS 2.2.1 General Requirements Do not use any combination of materials that form an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture, unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. Where unusual conditions exist, which would cause corrosion of conductors, use conductors with protective coatings or oversize conductors. Where a mechanical hazard is involved, increase the conductor size to compensate for the hazard or protect the conductors by covering them with molding or tubing made of wood or nonmagnetic material. When metallic conduit or tubing is used, the conductor shall be electrically connected at the upper and lower ends.

2.2.2 Main and Secondary Conductors Conductors shall be in accordance with NFPA 780 and UL 96 for Class I, Class II, or Class II modified materials as applicable.

2.2.2.1 Copper Copper conductors used on nonmetallic stacks shall weigh not less than 375 pounds/thousand feet, and the size of any wire in the cable shall be not less than No. 15 AWG. The thickness of any web or ribbon used on stacks


shall be not less than No. 12 AWG. Counterpoise shall be copper conductors not smaller than No. 1/0 AWG.

2.2.2.2 Aluminum Aluminum conductors shall not be used.

2.2.3 Air Terminals Terminals shall be in accordance with UL 96 and NFPA 780. The tip of air terminals on buildings used for manufacturing, processing, handling, or storing explosives, ammunition, or explosive ingredients shall be a minimum of 2 feet above the ridge parapet, ventilator or perimeter. On open or hooded vents emitting explosive dusts or vapors under natural or forced draft, air terminals shall be a minimum of 5 feet above the opening. On open stacks emitting explosive dusts, gases, or vapor under forced draft, air terminals shall extend a minimum of 15 feet above vent opening. Air terminals more than 24 inch in length shall be supported by a suitable brace, with guides not less than one-half the height of the terminal.

2.2.4 Ground Rods Rods made of copper-clad steel shall conform to UL 467 and galvanized ferrous rods shall conform to IEEE C135.30. Ground rods shall be not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length. Ground rods of copper-clad steel, stainless steel, galvanized ferrous, and solid copper shall not be mixed on the job.

2.2.5 Connectors Clamp-type connectors for splicing conductors shall conform to UL 96, class as applicable, and, Class 2, style and size as required for the installation. Clamp-type connectors shall only be used for the connection of the roof conductor to the air terminal and to the guttering. All other connections, bonds, and splices shall be done by exothermic welds or by high compression fittings. The exothermic welds and high compression fittings shall be listed for the purpose. The high compression fittings shall be the type which require a hydraulically operated mechanism to apply a minimum of 10,000 psi.

2.2.6 Lightning Protection Components Lightning protection components, such as bonding plates, air terminal supports, chimney bands, clips, and fasteners shall conform to UL 96, classes as applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work. No departures shall be made without the prior approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.2 INTEGRAL SYSTEM


3.2.1 General Requirements Provide a lightning protection system consisting of air terminals, roof conductors, down conductors, ground connections, and grounds, electrically interconnected to form the shortest distance to ground. All conductors on the structures shall be exposed except where conductors are in protective sleeves exposed on the outside walls. Secondary conductors shall interconnect with grounded metallic parts within the building. Interconnections made within side-flash distances shall be at or above the level of the grounded metallic parts.

3.2.1.1 Air Terminals Air terminal design and support shall be in accordance with NFPA 780. Terminals shall be rigidly connected to, and made electrically continuous with, roof conductors by means of pressure connectors or crimped joints of T-shaped malleable metal and connected to the air terminal by a dowel or threaded fitting. Air terminals at the ends of the structure shall be set not more than 2 feet from the ends of the ridge or edges and corners of roofs. Spacing of air terminals 2 feet in height on ridges, parapets, and around the perimeter of buildings with flat roofs shall not exceed 25 feet. In specific instances where it is necessary to exceed this spacing, the specified height of air terminals shall be increased not less than 2 inch for each foot of increase over 25 feet. On large, flat or gently sloping roofs, as defined in NFPA 780, air terminals shall be placed at points of the intersection of imaginary lines dividing the surface into rectangles having sides not exceeding 50 feet in length. Air terminals shall be secured against overturning either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means of a substantial tripod or other braces permanently and rigidly attached to the building or structure. Metal projections and metal parts of buildings, smokestacks, and other metal objects that do not contain hazardous materials and that may be struck but not appreciably damaged by lightning, need not be provided with air terminals. However, these metal objects shall be bonded to the lightning conductor through a metal conductor of the same unit weight per length as the main conductor. Where metal ventilators are installed, air terminals shall be mounted thereon, where practicable. Any air terminal erected by necessity adjacent to a metal ventilator shall be bonded to the ventilator near the top and bottom. Where metal ventilators are installed with air terminals mounted thereon, the air terminal shall not be more than 24 inch away from the farther edge or corner. If the air terminal is farther than this distance, an additional air terminal shall be added in order to meet this requirement. Where metal ventilators are installed with air terminals mounted adjacent, the air terminal shall not be more than 24 inches away from the farther edge or corner. If the air terminal is farther than this distance, an additional air terminal shall be added in order to meet this requirement.

3.2.1.2 Roof Conductors Roof conductors shall be connected directly to the roof or ridge roll. Sharp bends or turns in conductors shall be avoided. Necessary turns shall have a radius of not less than 8 inch. Conductors shall preserve a downward or horizontal course and shall be rigidly fastened every 3 feet along the roof and down the building to ground. Metal ventilators shall be rigidly connected to the roof conductor at three places. All connections shall be electrically continuous. Roof conductors shall be coursed along the contours of flat roofs, ridges, parapets, and edges; and where necessary,


over flat surfaces, in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest. Roof conductors surrounding tank tops, decks, flat surfaces, and flat roofs shall be connected to form a closed loop.

3.2.1.3 Down Conductors Down conductors shall be electrically continuous from air terminals and roof conductors to grounding electrodes. Down conductors shall be coursed over extreme outer portions of the building, such as corners, with consideration given to the location of ground connections and air terminals. Each building or structure shall have not less than two down conductors located as widely separated as practicable, at diagonally opposite corners. On rectangular structures having gable, hip, or gambrel roofs more than 110 feet long, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each additional 50 feet of length or fraction thereof. On rectangular structures having French, flat, or sawtooth roofs exceeding 250 feet in perimeter, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each 100 feet of perimeter or fraction thereof. On an L- or T-shaped structure, there shall be at least one additional down conductor; on an H-shaped structure, at least two additional down conductors; and on a wing-built structure, at least one additional down conductor for each wing. On irregularly shaped structures, the total number of down conductors shall be sufficient to make the average distance between them along the perimeter not greater than 100 feet. On structures exceeding 50 feet in height, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each additional 60 feet of height or fraction thereof, except that this application shall not cause down conductors to be placed about the perimeter of the structure at intervals of less than 50 feet. Additional down conductors shall be installed when necessary to avoid "dead ends" or branch conductors ending at air terminals, except where the air terminal is on a roof below the main protected level and the "dead end" or branch conductor is less than 16 feet in length and maintains a horizontal or downward coursing. Down conductors shall be equally and symmetrically spaced about the perimeter of the structure. Down conductors shall be protected by placing in rigid steel conduit for a minimum distance of 72 inch above finished grade level. The down conductor shall be bonded at the top and bottom of the conduit.

3.2.1.4 Interconnection of Metallic Parts Metal doors, windows, and gutters shall be connected directly to the grounds or down conductors using not smaller than No. 6 copper conductor, or equivalent. Conductors placed where there is probability of unusual wear, mechanical injury, or corrosion shall be of greater electrical capacity than would normally be used, or shall be protected. The ground connection to metal doors and windows shall be by means of mechanical ties under pressure, or equivalent.

3.2.1.5 Ground Connections Ground connections comprising continuations of down conductors from the structure to the grounding electrode shall securely connect the down conductor and ground in a manner to ensure electrical continuity between the two. All connections shall be of the clamp type. There shall be a ground connection for each down conductor. Metal water pipes and other large underground metallic objects shall be bonded together with all grounding mediums. Ground connections shall be protected from mechanical injury. In making ground connections, advantage shall be taken of all permanently moist


places where practicable, although such places shall be avoided if the area is wet with waste water that contains chemical substances, especially those corrosive to metal.

3.2.1.6 Grounding Electrodes A grounding electrode shall be provided for each down conductor located as shown. A driven ground shall extend into the earth for a distance of not less than 10 feet. Ground rods shall be set not less than 3 feet, nor more than 8 feet, from the structures foundation. The complete installation shall have a total resistance to ground of not more than 5 ohms if a counterpoise is not used. Ground rods shall be tested individually prior to connection to the system and the system as a whole shall be tested not less than 24 hours after rainfall. When the resistance of the complete installation exceeds the specified value or two ground rods individually exceed 5 ohms, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. A counterpoise, where required, shall be of No. 1/0 copper cable or equivalent material having suitable resistance to corrosion and shall be laid around the perimeter of the structure in a trench not less than 2 feet deep at a distance not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet from the nearest point of the structure. All connections between ground connectors and grounds or counterpoise, and between counterpoise and grounds shall be electrically continuous. Where so indicated on the drawings, an alternate method for grounding electrodes in shallow soil shall be provided by digging trenches radially from the building. The lower ends of the down conductors are then buried in the trenches.

3.2.2 Metal Roofs Wood-Frame, Wall-Bearing Masonry or Tile Structure with Metallic Roof and Nonmetallic Exterior Walls, or Reinforced Concrete Building with Metallic Roof: Metal roofs which are in the form of sections insulated from each other shall be made electrically continuous by bonding. Air terminals shall be connected to, and made electrically continuous with, the metal roof as well as the roof conductors and down conductors. Ridge cables and roof conductors shall be bonded to the roof at the upper and lower edges of the roof and at intervals not to exceed 100 feet. The down conductors shall be bonded to roof conductors and to the lower edge of the metal roof. Where the metal of the roof is in small sections, the air terminals and down conductors shall have connections made to at least four of the sections. All connections shall have electrical continuity and have a surface contact of at least 3 square inch.

3.2.3 Metal Roofs With Metal Walls Wood-Frame Building With Metal Roof and Metal Exterior Walls: The metal roof and the metal walls shall be bonded and made electrically continuous and considered as one unit. The air terminals shall be connected to and made electrically continuous with the metal roof as well as the roof and down conductors. All connections shall have electrical continuity and have a surface contact of at least 3 square inch.

3.2.4 Steel Frame Building The steel framework shall be made electrically continuous. Electrical continuity may be provided by bolting, riveting, or welding steel frame, unless a specific method is noted on the drawings. The air terminals shall


be connected to the structural steel framework at the ridge. Short runs of conductors shall be used as necessary to join air terminals to the metal framework so that proper placing of air terminals is maintained. Separate down conductors from air terminals to ground connections are not required. Where a grounded metal pipe water system enters the building, the structural steel framework and the water system shall be connected at the point of entrance by a ground connector. Connections to pipes shall be by means of ground clamps with lugs. Connections to structural framework shall be by means of nut and bolt or welding. All connections between columns and ground connections shall be made at the bottom of the steel columns. Ground connections to grounding electrons or counterpoise shall be run from not less than one-half of all the columns distributed equally around the perimeter of the structure at intervals averaging not more than 60 feet.

3.2.5 Ramps Lightning protection for covered ramps (connecting passageways) shall conform to the requirements for lightning protection systems for buildings of similar construction. A down conductor and a driven ground shall be placed at one of the corners where the ramp connects to each building or structure. This down conductor and driven ground shall be connected to the counterpoise or nearest ground connection of the building or structure. Where buildings or structures and connecting ramps are clad with metal, the metal of the buildings or structures and metal of the ramp shall be connected to ensure electrical continuity, in order to avoid the possibility of a flash-over or spark due to a difference in potential.

3.2.6 Igloo-Type Magazines In earth-covered reinforced-concrete, igloo-type magazines, the reinforcing steel shall be made electrically continuous. Electrical continuity may be provided by clipping or brazing, unless a specific method is noted on the drawings. The air terminals and roof conductors shall be securely connected to, and made electrically continuous with, the reinforcing steel. One air terminal shall be located on the top of the front wall and one on or adjacent to the ventilator in the rear. The air terminals shall extend vertically at least 2 feet above the top of the front wall and the highest point on the ventilator. Down conductors and grounding electrodes shall be provided at diagonally opposite corners of the magazine and shall be connected together. Grounding electrodes shall be connected to the horizontal reinforcing rods below the floor line of the wall system. The steel door frame shall be made electrically continuous with the reinforcing steel. The steel door shall be connected to the steel frame by means of a flexible copper strap or cable unless the steel hinges make the door and frame electrically continuous.

3.2.7 Tanks and Towers 3.2.7.1 Wooden Tanks and Towers The lightning protection system shall consist of air terminals, ridge cables, down conductors, ground connections, and grounds, electrically interconnected to form the shortest distance to ground. Where the roof of the structure ends in a peak, a single air terminal not less than 2 feet high will be regarded as sufficient. When the structure does not end in a peak, air terminals not less than 2 feet high shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 25 feet along the perimeter of the structure. When the tank


or tower is an adjunct of a building, near or touching the perimeter, one of the down conductors shall be extended directly to a ground connection and the other shall be connected to the lightning protection system of the building. When tank or tower is set well within the perimeter of a building, both down conductors shall be connected to the lightning protection system of the building. When the height of the facility exceeds 60 feet, the down conductors shall be cross-connected at intermediate levels not exceeding 60 feet. Where buried metal pipes enter the tank or tower, one down connector shall be connected to the pipes, approximately 1 foot below grade. Metal guy wires or cables attached to steel anchor rods set in earth will be considered as grounded. Metal guy wires or cables set in concrete or attached to buildings or nonconducting supports shall be grounded to a ground rod driven full length into the ground.

3.2.7.2 Metal or Reinforced-Concrete Tanks and Towers The metal or reinforcing steel shall be made electrically continuous. Electrical continuity may be provided by bolting, riveting, or welding metal and tying or clipping reinforcing bars, unless a specific method is noted on the drawings. Air terminals and down conductors are required except on bolted, riveted, or welded 3/16-inch minimum, steel plate tanks. Ground connections and grounding electrodes are not required on metal tanks that are electrically continuous with a metallic underground pipe system. On other structures, two ground connections shall be provided approximately 180 degrees apart, at the base of the structure. Where buried metal pipes enter the tank or tower, one ground connection shall be connected to them, approximately 1 foot below finished grade. Metal guy wires on tanks and towers shall be grounded. Metal guy wires or cables attached to steel anchor rods set in earth will be considered as grounded. Metal guy wires or cables set in concrete or attached to buildings or nonconducting supports shall be grounded to a ground rod driven full length into the ground.

3.2.8 Stacks Metal guy wires for stacks shall be grounded. Metal guy wires or cables attached to steel anchor rods set in the earth will be considered as sufficiently well grounded. Metal guy wires or cables attached to anchor rods set in concrete or attached to buildings or nonconducting supports shall be grounded to a ground rod driven full length into the ground.

3.2.8.1 Metal Stacks Metal smokestacks shall be electrically continuous and be grounded. Where the construction of the foundation does not provide 5 ohms maximum to ground, the stack shall be grounded to two ground rods driven full length into the earth. Ground rods shall be located approximately 180 degrees apart and shall be set not less than 3 feet from the nearest point of the stack foundation.

3.2.8.2 Nonmetallic Stacks On nonmetallic smokestacks constructed of brick, hollow tile, or concrete, the air terminals shall be made of solid copper, copper alloy, stainless steel or Monel metal. Air terminals shall be uniformly distributed about the rim of the stack at intervals not exceeding 8 feet and shall extend 18 to 30 inch above the stack if side mounted or18 inch above the stack if top mounted. Air terminals shall be at least 5/8 inch in diameter, exclusive of


the corrosion protection. Top-mounted air terminals shall not extend more than 18 inch above the top of the stack. The air terminals shall be electrically connected together by means of a metal band or ring to form a closed loop about 2 feet below the top of the stack. Where the stack has a metal crown, the air terminals shall be connected thereto. Where stacks have a metal lining extending part way up, the lining shall be connected to the air terminal at its upper end and grounded at the bottom. At least two down conductors shall be provided on opposite sides of the stack leading from the ring or crown at the top to the ground. When the stack is an adjunct of a building near or touching the building perimeter, one of the down conductors shall be extended directly to a ground connection while the other may be connected to a lightning protection system on the building. On stacks exceeding 160 feet in height, the down conductors shall be cross-connected approximately midway between the top and the bottom. Joints in conductors shall be as few as practicable and shall provide a strength in tension equal to that of the conductor. Fasteners of copper or copper-bronze alloy shall be spaced not over 3 feet apart for vertical conductors and not over 2 feet apart for horizontal conductors. To prevent corrosion by gases, copper air terminals, conductors, and fasteners within 25 feet of the top of the stack shall have a continuous covering of lead at least 1/16-inch thick. Stacks partly or wholly of reinforced concrete shall conform to the requirements for nonmetallic stacks, and in addition, the reinforcing steel shall be electrically connected to down conductors at the top and bottom of the concrete.

3.2.9 Post Tensioning Systems On construction utilizing post tensioning systems to secure precast concrete sections, the post tension rods shall not be used as a path for lightning to ground. Down conductors shall be provided on structures using post tensioning systems; down conductors shall have sufficient separation from post tension rods to prevent side-flashing. Post tension rods shall be bonded to the lightning protection and grounding systems only at the base of the structure; this bonding shall be performed in strict accordance with the recommendations of the post tension rod manufacturer, and shall be done by, or in the presence of, a representative of the manufacturer.

3.3 RAILROADS Rails that are not electrically continuous and rail switches shall be bonded together by means of flexible copper cable or straps for a distance of at least 100 feet on each side of structures in which explosives, ammunition, or explosive ingredients are stored, handled, manufactured, or processed. These rails shall also be grounded. Rails shall be grounded at points 150 feet on each side of overhead line crossings in excess of 600 volts and rails shall be bonded between grounds. At points where the tracks come within 25 feet of structures provided with a grounding system, such grounds shall be interconnected to the nearest rail. The cable used for the interconnection shall be at least 3/8 inch diameter or the same size as the conductors used on the structure. Isolation joints shall be installed in metal rails outside of hazardous areas to avoid stray currents being conducted into the bonded or grounded area.

3.4 PIERS AND WHARVES Lightning protection systems for piers and wharves shall conform to the requirements specified for the type of construction involved.


3.5 INTERCONNECTION OF METAL BODIES Metal bodies of conductance shall be protected if not within the zone of protection of an air terminal. Metal bodies of conductance having an area of 400 square inch or greater or a volume of 1000 cubic inch or greater shall be bonded to the lightning protection system using main size conductors and a bonding plate having a surface contact area of not less than 3 square inch. Provisions shall be made to guard against the corrosive effect of bonding dissimilar metals. Metal bodies of inductance shall be bonded at their closest point to the lightning protection system using secondary bonding conductors and fittings. A metal body that exceeds 5 feet in any dimension, that is situated wholly within a building, and that does not at any point come within 6 feet of a lightning conductor or metal connected thereto shall be independently grounded.

3.6 FENCES Except as indicated below, metal fences that are electrically continuous with metal posts extending at least 2 feet into the ground require no additional grounding. Other fences shall be grounded on each side of every gate. Fences shall be grounded by means of ground rods every 1000 to 1500 feet of length when fences are located in isolated places, and every 500 to 750 feet when in proximity (100 feet or less) to public roads, highways, and buildings. The connection to ground shall be made from the post where it is of metal and is electrically continuous with the fencing. All metal fences shall be grounded at or near points crossed by overhead lines in excess of 600 volts and at distances not exceeding 150 feet on each side of line crossings.

3.7 EXTERIOR OVERHEAD PIPE LINES Overhead pipes, conduits, and cable tray that enter a building containing explosives shall be properly grounded on the exterior of the building, preferably to the building grounds at points where the pipes enter the building. Where a separate ground is used, the pipes shall also be bonded to the building ground at points where the pipes are closest to the ground connections. In addition, the pipes shall be bonded to any metallic masses that are within 6 feet of the pipes.

3.8 SEPARATELY MOUNTED SHIELDING SYSTEM, MAST-TYPE The mast-type protection shall consist of a pole, which, when of a nonconducting material, shall be provided with an air terminal mounted to the top, extending not less than 2 feet nor more than 5 feet above the top of the pole and a down conductor run down the side of the pole and connected to the ground rod. When a metal pole is used, the pole will act as a down conductor, and an air terminal need not be provided. Where the resistance of the pole to ground is 5 ohms or less, additional grounding is unnecessary. Where the resistance exceeds 5 ohms, additional grounding shall be provided, and the ground connection shall be fastened to the metal pole and the ground. When a ground rod is necessary, the rod shall be driven approximately 6 feet from the base of the pole. When the combined measured resistance to ground of the pole and ground rod exceeds 5 ohms, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. The grounding system at the base of the pole shall be interconnected with any grounding system provided for the protected structure.


3.9 SEPARATELY MOUNTED SHIELDING SYSTEM, OVERHEAD GROUND-WIRE TYPE This type of protection shall consist of two or more poles electrically connected to each other by overhead conductors. Where the poles are made of a nonconducting material, an air terminal shall be mounted to the top of each pole and shall extend not less than 2 feet nor more than 5 feet above the top of the pole. Down conductors shall be run down the side of the pole, or a guy wire may be used as a conductor. When the guy wire is used, the guy wire and the overhead ground wire shall be dead-ended at the pole. The overhead ground wire and the guy wire shall then be connected to each other by a separate cable using standard cable clamps in such manner that the discharge will not be reversed at any point. Guy wires used as down conductors shall be grounded by means of separate ground rods with cable connections clamped to the lower end of guy wire. Resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Where metal poles are used, air terminals are not required and if resistance of the poles to ground is 5 ohms or less, additional grounding is unnecessary. Where the resistance to ground exceeds 5 ohms, additional grounding shall be provided and the ground connection shall be fastened to the metal pole and the ground. The height of the poles shall be sufficient to provide a clearance of not less than 6 feet between the overhead ground wire and the highest projection of the building. When the ground cable runs across and is used to protect stacks or vents that emit explosive dusts, vapors, or gases under forced draft, the cable shall have at least 15 feet clearance above the stack or vent. When grounding is required, a ground rod shall be driven approximately 6 feet from the base of each pole. When the combined measured resistance to ground of the pole and ground rod exceeds 5 ohms, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. When a counterpoise is used, the entire system resistance requirement of 5 ohms or less need not be met.

3.10 INSPECTION The lightning protection system will be inspected by the Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the requirements of this specification. No part of the system shall be concealed until so authorized by the Contracting Officer.




SECTION 26 42 14.00 10

CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM B 418 (2006) Standard Specification for Cast and

Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes ASTM B 843 (2007) Standard Specification for Magnesium

Alloy Anodes for Cathodic Protection ASTM D 1248 (2005) Standard Specification for

Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable

NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE RP0193 (2001) External Cathodic Protection of On-

Grade Carbon Steel Storage Tank Bottoms NACE RP0285 (2002) Corrosion Control of Underground

Storage Tank Systems by Cathodic Protection NACE SP0169 (2007) Control of External Corrosion on

Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

NACE SP0177 (2007) Mitigation of Alternating Current and

Lightning Effects on Metallic Structures and Corrosion Control Systems

NACE SP0188 (2006) Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New

Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA TC 2 (2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl



2008 Edition



40 CFR 280 Technical Standards and Corrective Action Requirements for Owners and Operators of Underground Storage Tanks (UST)

49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by

Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards 49 CFR 195 Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by

Pipeline

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 510 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2005) Polyvinyl Chloride,

Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape UL 514A (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for

Metallic Outlet Boxes UL 6 (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal

Conduit-Steel 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide a complete, operating, sacrificial anode cathodic protection system in complete compliance with NFPA 70, with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations and with the minimum requirements of this contract. In addition to the minimum requirements of these specifications, construction of gas pipelines and associated cathodic protection systems shall be in compliance with 49 CFR 192and construction of hazardous liquid pipelines, including fuel pipelines, and associated cathodic protection systems shall be in compliance with 49 CFR 195 and construction and installation of underground fuel storage tanks and associated cathodic protection system shall be in compliance with 40 CFR 280. The services required include planning, installation, adjusting and testing of a cathodic protection system, using sacrificial anodes for cathodic protection of the Water, Fire Protection, Force Main, Gas lines, their connectors and lines under the slab or floor foundation as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. The cathodic protection system shall include anodes, cables, connectors, corrosion protection test stations, and any other equipment required for a complete operating system providing the NACE criteria of protection as specified. Insulators are required whenever needed to insulate the pipes from any other structure. Test stations are required as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. The cathodic protection shall be provided on Water, Fire Protection, Force Main and Gas pipes as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

1.2.1 Contractor's Modifications The specified system is based on a complete system with magnesium sacrificial anodes. The Contractor may modify the cathodic protection system after review of the project, site verification, and analysis, if the proposed modifications include the anodes specified and will provide better overall system performance. The modifications shall be fully described, shall be approved by the Contracting Officer's representative, and shall meet the following criteria. The proposed system shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts with reference to a saturated copper-copper sulfate reference cell on the underground components of the piping or other metallic surface. Take resistivity


measurements of the soil in the vicinity of the pipes and ground bed sites. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage shall be required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the structure being tested and the reference cell. This potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area. The anode system shall be designed for a life of twenty-five (25) years of continuous operation.

1.2.2 Summary of Services Required The scope of services shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

a. Close-interval potential surveys.

b. Cathodic Protection Systems.

c. System testing.

d. Casing corrosion control.

e. Interference testing.

f. Training.

g. Operating and maintenance manual.

h. Insulator testing and bonding testing.

i. Coating and holiday testing to be submitted within 45 days of notice to proceed.

1.2.3 Tests of Components Perform a minimum of four (4) tests at each metallic component in the piping system. Two (2) measurements shall be made directly over the anodes and the other two (2) tests shall be over the outer edge of the component, but at the farthest point from the anodes. Structure and pipes shall be shown with the cathodic protection equipment. All components of the cathodic protection system shall be shown on drawings, showing their relationship to the protected structure or component. A narrative shall describe how the cathodic protection system will work and provide testing at each component. Components requiring cathodic protection shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Pipes under the floor slab or foundations.

b. PIV.

c. Shutoff valves.

d. Metallic pipe extended from aboveground locations.

e. Each connector or change-of-direction device.

f. Any metallic pipe component or section.

g. Backflow preventor.


h. Culvert.

1.2.4 Electrical Potential Measurements All potential tests shall be made at a minimum of 10 foot intervals witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Submittals shall identify test locations on separate drawing, showing all metal to be protected and all cathodic protection equipment. Test points equipment and protected metal shall be easily distinguished and identified.

1.2.5 Achievement of Criteria for Protection All conductors, unless otherwise shown, shall be routed to or through the test stations. Each system provided shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolt potentials with reference to a saturated copper-copper-sulfate reference cell on all underground components of the piping. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage of the anodes should be adjusted as required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the structure being tested and the reference cell. This potential should be obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area. This must be achieved without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1150 millivolts. Testing will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Provide additional anodes if required to achieve the minus 850 millivolts "instant off". Although acceptance criteria of the cathodic protection systems are defined in NACE SP0169, for this project the "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts is the only acceptable criteria.

1.2.6 Metallic Components and Typicals

a. Metallic components: As a minimum, protect each metallic component with two (2) magnesium anodes. This number of anodes is required to achieve minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential on the metallic area and at the same time not provide overvoltage above 1150 millivolts "instant off." Magnesium anode unpackaged weight shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. The magnesium anodes shall be located on each side of the metallic component and routed through a test station.

b. Fire Hydrants: Fire hydrant pipe components shall have a minimum of two (2) anodes. These magnesium anodes shall have an unpackaged weight of 17 pounds.

c. Pipe Under Concrete Slab: Pipe under concrete slab shall have magnesium anodes having an unpackaged weight as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Pipe under concrete slab shall have permanent reference electrodes located under the slab as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. One (1) permanent reference electrode shall be located where the pipe enters the concrete slab. All conductors shall be routed to a test station.

d. Valves: Each valve shall be protected with magnesium anodes having an unpackaged weight as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

e. Metallic Pipe Component or Section: Each section of metallic pipe shall be protected with magnesium anodes having an unpackaged weight as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.


f. Connectors or Change-of-Direction Devices: Each change-of-direction device shall be protected with magnesium anodes having an unpackaged weight as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

1.2.7 Metallic Component Coating Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings as indicated. This will include fire hydrants, T's, elbows, valves, etc. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified in these specifications. All aboveground pipeline shall be coated as indicated or as approved. The coating shall have a minimum thickness of 7 mil. The pipeline coating shall be in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations.


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings; G

Two complete hard copies and one electronic copy in AutoCAD (.dwg) format on CD or DVD of detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and material including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, results of system design calculations including soil-resistivity, installation instructions and certified test data stating the maximum recommended anode current output density and the rate of gaseous production if any at that current density. Include in the detail drawings complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a unit.

Contractor's Modifications; G

Two complete hard copies and one electronic copy in AutoCAD (.dwg) format on CD or DVD of detail drawings showing proposed changes in location, scope of performance indicating any variations from, additions to, or clarifications of contract drawings. Show proposed changes in anode arrangement, anode size and number, anode materials and layout details, conduit size, wire size, mounting details, wiring diagram, method for electrically-isolating each pipe, and any other pertinent information to proper installation and performance of the system.

SD-03 Product Data

Equipment; G

An itemized list of equipment and materials including item number, quantity, and manufacturer of each item, within 30 days


after receipt of notice to proceed. The list shall be accompanied by a description of procedures for each type of testing and adjustments, including testing of coating for thickness and holidays. Installation of materials and equipment shall not commence until this submittal is approved.

Spare Parts

Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than six (6) months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. One (1) spare anode of each type shall be furnished.

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests and Measurements; G

Test reports in booklet form tabulating all field tests and measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system and including close interval potential survey, casing and interference tests, final system test verifying protection, insulated joint and bond tests, and holiday coating test. A certified test report showing that the connecting method has passed a 120-day laboratory test without failure at the place of connection, wherein the anode is subjected to maximum recommended current output while immersed in a three percent sodium chloride solution.


Final report regarding Contractor's modifications. The report shall include pipe-to-soil measurements throughout the affected area, indicating that the modifications improved the overall conditions, and current measurements for anodes. The following special materials and information are required: taping materials and conductors; zinc grounding cell, installation and testing procedures, and equipment; coating material; system design calculations for anode number, life, and parameters to achieve protective potential; backfill shield material and installation details showing waterproofing; bonding and waterproofing details; insulated resistance wire; exothermic weld equipment and material.

SD-07 Certificates

Cathodic Protection System

Proof that the materials and equipment furnished under this section conform to the specified requirements contained in the referenced standards or publications. The label or listing by the specified agency will be acceptable evidence of such compliance.

Services of "Corrosion Expert"; G

Evidence of qualifications of the "corrosion expert."


a. The "corrosion expert's" name and qualifications shall be certified in writing to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction.

b. Certification shall be submitted giving the name of the firm, the number of years of experience, and a list of not less than five (5) of the firm's installations three (3) or more years old that have been tested and found satisfactory.



Before final acceptance of the cathodic protection system, six copies of operating manuals outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, adjustment of current flow, and shutdown. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Six copies of maintenance manual, listing routine maintenance procedures, recommendation for maintenance testing, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The manuals shall include single-line diagrams for the system as installed; instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell and tank-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of monitoring; instructions for dielectric connections, interference and sacrificial anode bonds; instructions shall include precautions to ensure safe conditions during repair of pipe or other metallic systems. The instructions shall be neatly bound between permanent covers and titled "Operating and Maintenance Instructions." These instructions shall be submitted for the Contracting Officer's approval. The instructions shall include the following:

a. As-built drawings, to scale of the entire system, showing the locations of the piping, location of all anodes and test stations, locations of all insulating joints, and structure-to-reference cell potentials as measured during the tests required by Paragraph: TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS, of this section.

b. Recommendations for maintenance testing, including instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of testing.

c. All maintenance and operating instructions and nameplate data shall be in English.

d. Instructions shall include precautions to insure safe conditions during repair of pipe system.

Training Course

The proposed Training Course Curriculum (including topics and dates of discussion) indicating that all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions, are to be covered.


1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Services of "Corrosion Expert" Obtain the services of a "corrosion expert" to supervise, inspect, and test the installation and performance of the cathodic protection system. "Corrosion expert" refers to a person, who by thorough knowledge of the physical sciences and the principles of engineering and mathematics, acquired by professional education and related practical experience, is qualified to engage in the practice of corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic surfaces. Such a person must be accredited or certified by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as a NACE Accredited Corrosion Specialist or a NACE certified Cathodic Protection (CP) Specialist or be a registered professional engineer who has certification or licensing that includes education and experience in corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic piping and tank systems, if such certification or licensing includes 5 years experience in corrosion control on underground metallic surfaces of the type under this contract. The "corrosion expert" shall make at least 3 visits to the project site. The first of these visits shall include obtaining soil resistivity data, acknowledging the type of pipeline coatings to be used and reporting to the Contractor the type of cathodic protection required. Once the submittals are approved and the materials delivered, the "corrosion expert" shall revisit the site the ensure the Contractor understands installation practices and laying out the components. The third visit shall involve testing the installed cathodic protection systems and training applicable personnel on proper maintenance techniques. The "corrosion expert" shall supervise installation and testing of all cathodic protection.

1.4.2 Isolators Isolators are required to insulate the indicated pipes from any other structure. Isolators shall be provided with lightning protection and a test station as shown.

1.4.3 Anode and Bond Wires Magnesium anodes with an unpackaged weight as stated in the Delivery or Task Order shall be provided at uniform distances along the metallic pipe lines. Test stations shall be provided for these anodes as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. These anodes shall be in addition to anodes for the pipe under concrete slab and casing requirements. For each cathodic system, the metallic components and structures to be protected shall be made electrically continuous. This shall be accomplished by installing bond wires between the various structures. Bonding of existing buried structures may also be required to preclude detrimental stray current effects and safety hazards. Provisions shall be included to return stray current to its source without damaging structures intercepting the stray current. The electrical isolation of underground facilities in accordance with acceptable industry practice shall be included under this section. All tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer.

1.4.4 Surge Protection Approved zinc grounding cells or sealed weatherproof lightning arrestor devices shall be installed across insulated flanges or fittings installed in


underground piping as indicated on the drawings. The arrestor shall be gapless, self-healing, solid state type. Zinc anode composition shall conform to ASTM B 418, Type II. Lead wires shall be number 6 AWG copper with high molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation. The zinc grounding cells shall not be prepackaged in backfill but shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Lightning arrestors or zinc grounding cells are not required for insulated flanges on metallic components used on nonmetallic piping systems.

1.4.5 Nonmetallic Pipe System In the event pipe other than metallic pipe is approved and used in lieu of metallic pipe, all metallic components of this pipe system shall be protected with cathodic protection. Detailed drawings of cathodic protection for each component shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval within 45 days after date of receipt of notice to proceed, and before commencement of any work.

1.4.5.1 Coatings Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings. Protective covering (coating and taping) shall be completed and tested on each metallic component (such as valves, hydrants and fillings). This covering shall be as required for underground metallic pipe. Each test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified in these specifications. The use of nonmetallic pipe does not change other requirements of the specifications. Any deviations due to the use of nonmetallic pipe shall be submitted for approval.

1.4.5.2 Tracer Wire When a nonmetallic pipe line is used to extend or add to an existing metallic line, an insulated No. 8 AWG copper wire shall be thermit-welded to the existing metallic line and run the length of the new nonmetallic line. This wire shall be used as a locator tracer wire and to maintain continuity to any future extensions of the pipe line.

1.4.6 Drawings Detailed drawings shall be provided showing location of anodes, insulated fittings, test stations, permanent reference cells, and bonding. Locations shall be referenced to two (2) permanent facilities or mark points.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Storage area for magnesium anodes will be designated by the Contracting Officer. If anodes are not stored in a building, tarps or similar protection should be used to protect anodes from inclement weather. Packaged anodes, damaged as a result of improper handling or being exposed to rain, shall be resacked and the required backfill added.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS After approval of shop drawings, and not later than three (3) months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy, furnish spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. The data shall include


a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. In addition, supply information for material and equipment replacement for all other components of the complete system, including anodes, cables, splice kits and connectors, corrosion test stations, and any other components not listed above. Furnish a reference cell on a reel with 350 feet of conductor, along with other accessories, and a digital voltmeter that can be used in the maintenance of this cathodic protection system. Use of this equipment shall be demonstrated in actual tests during the training course, which shall include a description of the the equipment and measurement of the pipe-to-soil potential, rainfall, and gas company voltages.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MAGNESIUM ANODES Install anodes on Pipe or Tank system as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. See Paragraph METALLIC COMPONENTS AND TYPICALS for additional anodes under slab.

2.1.1 Anode Composition Anodes shall be of high-potential magnesium alloy, made of primary magnesium obtained from sea water or brine, and not made from scrap metal. Magnesium anodes shall conform to ASTM B 843 and to the following analysis (in percents) otherwise indicated:

Aluminum, max. 0.010 Manganese, max. 0.50 to 1.30 Zinc 0.05 Silicon, max. 0.05 Copper, max. 0.02 Nickel, max. 0.001 Iron, Max. 0.03 Other impurities, max. 0.05 each or 0.3 max. total Magnesium Remainder

Furnish spectrographic analysis on samples from each heat or batch of anodes used on this project.

2.1.2 Dimensions and Weights Dimensions and weights of anodes shall be approximately as follows:

TYPICAL MAGNESIUM ANODE SIZE (Cross sections may be round, square, or D shaped) NOMINAL GROSS NOMINAL APPROX. WT lb PACKAGED NOMINAL PACKAGE WT. LBS. SIZE (IN) IN BACKFILL DIMENSIONS (IN) _________________________________________________________________________ 3 3 X 3 X 5 8 5-1/4 X 5-1/4 X 8 5 3 X 3 X 8 13 5-1/4 X 5-1/4 X 11-1/4 9 3 X 3 X 14 27 5-1/4 X 20 12 4 X 4 X 12 32 7-1/2 X 18


17 4 X 4 X 17 45 7-1/2 X 24 32 5 X 5 X 20-1/2 68 8-1/2 X 28 50 7 X 7 X 16 100 10 X 24 2.1.3 Packaged Anodes Provide anodes in packaged form with the anode surrounded by specially-prepared quick-wetting backfill and contained in a water permeable cloth or paper sack. Anodes shall be centered by means of spacers in the backfill material. The backfill material shall have the following composition, unless otherwise indicated:

Material Approximate Percent by Weight

Gypsum 75 Bentonite 20 Sodium Sulphate 5

Total 100

2.1.4 Zinc Anodes Zinc anodes shall conform to ASTM B 418, Type II.

2.1.5 Connecting Wire 2.1.5.1 Wire Requirements Wire shall be No. 12 or 10 AWG solid copper wire, not less than 10 feet long, unspliced, complying with NFPA 70, Type TW or RHH insulation. Connecting wires for magnesium anodes shall be factory installed with the place or emergence from the anode in a cavity sealed flush with a dielectric sealing compound. Connecting wires for zinc anodes shall be factory installed with the place of connection to the protruding steel core completely sealed with a dielectric material.

2.1.5.2 Anode Header Cable Cable for anode header and distribution shall be stranded copper wire with type CP high molecular weight polyethylene, 7/64 inch thick insulation, 600-volt rating, AWG as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 2.2.1 Electrical Wire Wire shall be No. 12 or 10 AWG stranded copper wire with NFPA 70, Type TW, RHW-USE or Polyethylene insulation. Polyethylene insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D 1248 and shall be of the following types, classes, and grades:

High-molecular weight polyethylene shall be Type I, Class C, Grade E5.

High-density polyethylene shall be Type III, Class C, Grade E3.

2.2.1.1 Wire Splicing


Connecting wire splicing shall be made with copper compression connectors or exothermic welds, following instructions of the manufacturer. Single split-bolt connections shall not be used. Sheaths for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall fit the insulated wires entering the spliced joints and epoxy potting compound shall be as specified below.

2.2.1.2 Test Wires Test wires shall be AWG No. 12 stranded copper wire with NFPA 70, Type TW or RHW or polyethylene insulation.

2.2.1.3 Resistance Wire Resistance wire shall be AWG No. 16 or No. 22 nickel-chromium wire.

2.2.2 Conduit Rigid galvanized steel conduit and accessories shall conform to UL 6. Non metallic conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 2.

2.2.3 Test Boxes and Junctions Boxes Boxes shall be outdoor type conforming to UL 514A.

2.2.4 Joint, Patch, Seal, and Repair Coating Sealing and dielectric compound shall be a black, rubber based compound that is soft, permanently pliable, tacky, moldable, and unbacked. Compound shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 1/2-inch thick. Coating compound shall be cold-applied coal-tar base mastic or hot-applied coal-tar enamel. Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510.

2.2.5 Backfill Shields Shields shall consist of approved pipeline wrapping or fiberglass-reinforced, coal-tar impregnated tape, or plastic weld caps, specifically made for the purpose and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When joint bonds are required, due to the use of mechanical joints, the entire joint shall be protected by the use of a kraft paper joint cover. The joint cover shall be filled with poured-in, hot coat-tar enamel.

2.2.6 Epoxy Potting Compound Compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall be a two package system made for the purpose.

2.2.7 Test Stations Stations shall be of the aboveground or flush-curb-box type and shall be the standard product of a recognized manufacturer. Test stations shall be complete with an insulated terminal block having the required number of terminals. The test station shall be provided with a lockable over and shall have an embossed legend, "C.P. Test." A minimum of one (1) test station shall be provided each component of the pipe or tank. A minimum of six (6) terminals shall be provided in each test station. A minimum of two


(2) leads are required to the metallic pipe from each test station. Other conductors shall be provided for each anode, other foreign pipe, and reference cells as required. Test stations may be constructed of nonmetallic materials. However, if nonmetallic materials are utilized, as a minimum, the materials shall be resistant to damage from ultraviolet radiation, contain good color retention qualities, contain high strength qualities, and be resistant to accidental or vandalistic impacts that might be normally encountered in the environment for which they are to be installed. The test stations shall be listed for the particular application for which they are to be utilized.

2.2.8 Joint and Continuity Bonds Bonds shall be provided across all joints in metallic lines, across any electrically discontinuous connections and all other pipes and structures with other than welded or threaded joints that are included in this cathodic protection system. Unless otherwise specified in the specifications, bonds between structures and across joints in pipe with other than welded or threaded joints shall be No. 8 AWG stranded copper cable with polyethylene insulation. Bonds between structures shall contain sufficient slack for any anticipated movement between structures. Bonds across pipe joints shall contain a minimum of 4 inch of slack to allow for pipe movement and soil stress. Bonds shall be attached by exothermic welding. Exothermic weld areas shall be insulated with coating compound and approved, and witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Continuity bonds shall be installed as necessary to reduce stray current interference. Additional joint bondings shall be accomplished where the necessity is discovered during construction or testing or where the Contracting Officer's representative directs that such bonding be done. Joint bonding shall include all associated excavation and backfilling. There shall be a minimum of two (2) continuity bonds between each structure and other than welded or threaded joints. Test for electrical continuity across all joints with other than welded or threaded joints and across all metallic portions or components. The Contractor shall provide bonding as required and as specified above until electrical continuity is achieved. Bonding test data shall be submitted for approval.

2.2.9 Resistance Bonds Resistance bonds should be adjusted as outlined in this specification. Alternate methods may be used if they are approved by the Contracting Officer.

2.2.10 Stray Current Measurements Stray current measurements should be performed at each test station. Stray currents resulting from lightning or overhead alternating current (AC) power transmission systems shall be mitigated in accordance with NACE SP0177.

2.2.11 Electrical Isolation of Structures As a minimum, isolating flanges or unions shall be provided at the following locations:

a. Connection of new metallic piping or components to existing piping.

b. Pressure piping under floor slab to a building.


Isolation shall be provided at metallic connection of all lines to existing system and where connecting to a building. Additionally, isolation shall be provided between water and/or gas or forced main line; and foreign pipes that cross the new lines within 10 feet. Isolation fittings, including isolating flanges and couplings, shall be installed aboveground or in a concrete pit.

2.2.11.1 Electrically Isolating Pipe Joints Electrically isolating pipe joints shall be of a type that is in regular factory production.

2.2.11.2 Electrically Conductive Couplings Electrically conductive couplings shall be of a type that has a published maximum electrical resistance rating given in the manufacturer's literature. Cradles and seals shall be of a type that is in regular factory production made for the purpose of electrically insulating the carrier pipe from the casing and preventing the incursion of water into the annular space.

2.2.11.3 Insulating Joint Testing A Model 601 Insulation Checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics", an approved equal, shall be used for insulating joint (flange) electrical testing.

2.2.12 Underground Structure Coating This coating specification shall take precedence over any other project specification and drawing notes, whether stated or implied, and shall also apply to the pipeline or tank supplier. No variance in coating quality shall be allowed by the Contractor or Base Construction Representative without the written consent of the designer. All underground metallic pipelines and tanks to be cathodically protected shall be afforded a good quality factory-applied coating. This includes all carbon steel, cast-iron and ductile-iron pipelines or vessels. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified. If non-metallic pipelines are installed, all metallic fittings on pipe sections shall be coated in accordance with this specification section.

a. The nominal thickness of the metallic pipe joint or other component coating shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, plus or minus 5 percent.

b. Pipe and joint coating for factory applied or field repair material shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be one of the following:

(1) Continuously extruded polyethylene and adhesive coating system. (2) Polyvinyl chloride pressure-sensitive adhesive tape. (3) High density polyethylene/bituminous rubber compound tape. (4) Butyl rubber tape. (5) Coal tar epoxy.

2.2.12.1 Field Joints


All field joints shall be coated with materials compatible with the pipeline coating compound. The joint coating material shall be applied to an equal thickness as the pipeline coating. Unbonded coatings shall not be used on these buried metallic components. This includes the elimination of all unbonded polymer wraps or tubes. Once the pipeline or vessel is set in the trench, an inspection of the coating shall be conducted. This inspection shall include electrical holiday detection. Any damaged areas of the coating shall be properly repaired. The Contracting Officer shall be asked to witness inspection of the coating and testing using a holiday detector.

2.2.12.2 Inspection of Pipe Coatings Any damage to the protective covering during transit and handling shall be repaired before installation. After field coating and wrapping has been applied, the entire pipe shall be inspected by an electric holiday detector with impressed current in accordance with NACE SP0188 using a full-ring, spring-type coil electrode. The holiday detector shall be equipped with a bell, buzzer, or other type of audible signal which sounds when a holiday is detected. All holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired immediately upon detection. Occasional checks of holiday detector potential will be made by the Contracting Officer's representative to determine suitability of the detector. All labor, materials, and equipment necessary for conducting the inspection shall be furnished by the Contractor.

a. Protective covering for aboveground piping system: Finish painting shall conform to the applicable paragraph of SECTION: 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS and as follows:

b. Ferrous surfaces: Shop-primed surfaces shall be touched-up with ferrous metal primer. Surfaces that have not been shop-primed shall be solvent-cleaned. Surfaces that contain loose rust, loose mil scale, and other foreign substances shall be mechanically-cleaned by power wire-brushing and primed with ferrous metal primer. Primed surface shall be finished with two (2) coats of exterior oil paint and vinyl paint. Coating for each entire piping service shall be an approved pipe line wrapping having a minimum coating resistance of 50,000 Ohms per square foot.

2.2.13 Resistance Wire Wire shall be No. 16 or No. 22 nickel-chromium wire with TW insulation.

2.2.14 Electrical Connections Electrical connections shall be done as follows:

a. Exothermic welds shall be "Cadweld", " Bundy", "Thermoweld", or an approved equal. Use of this material shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

b. Electrical-shielded arc welds shall be approved for use on steel pipe by shop drawing submittal action.

c. Brazing shall be as specified in Paragraph: Lead Wire Connections.

2.2.15 Electrical Tape


Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510. 2.2.16 Permanent Reference Electrodes Permanent reference electrodes shall be Cu-CuS04 electrodes suitable for direct burial. Electrodes shall be guaranteed by the supplier for 15 years' service in the environment in which they shall be placed. Electrodes shall be installed directly beneath pipe, or metallic component.

2.2.17 Casing Where a pipeline is installed in a casing under a roadway or railway, the pipeline shall be electrically insulated from the casing, and the annular space sealed and filled with an approved corrosion inhibiting product against incursion of water.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CRITERIA OF PROTECTION Acceptance criteria for determining the adequacy of protection on a buried underground pipe, tank or metallic component shall be in accordance with NACE SP0169, NACE RP0193 and NACE RP0285 and as specified below.

3.1.1 Iron and Steel The following method a. shall be used for testing cathodic protection voltages. If more than one method is required, method b. shall be used.

a. A negative voltage of at least minus 850 millivolts as measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode connecting the earth (electrolyte) directly over the underground component. Determination of this voltage shall be made with the cathodic protection system in operation. Voltage drops shall be considered for valid interpretation of this voltage measurement. A minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the underground component being tested and the reference cell shall be achieved over 95 percent of the area of the structure. Adequate number of measurements shall be obtained over the entire structure, pipe, tank, or other metallic component to verify and record achievement of minus 850 millivolts "instant off." This potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the total metallic area without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1200 millivolts.

b. A minimum polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts as measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth directly over the underground component. This polarization voltage shift shall be determined by interrupting the protective current and measuring the polarization decay. When the protective current is interrupted, an immediate voltage shift will occur. The voltage reading, after the immediate shift, shall be used as the base reading from which to measure polarization decay. Measurements achieving 100 millivolts decay shall be made over 95 percent of the metallic surface being protected.


c. For any metallic component, a minimum of four (4) measurements shall be made using subparagraph a., above, and achieving the "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts. Two (2) measurements shall be made over the anodes and two (2) measurements shall be made at different locations near the component and farthest away from the anode.

3.1.2 Aluminum Aluminum underground components shall not be protected to a potential more negative than minus 1200 millivolts, measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth, directly over the metallic component. Resistance, if required, shall be inserted in the anode circuit within the test station to reduce the potential of the aluminum to a value which will not exceed a potential more negative than minus 1200 millivolts. Voltage shift criterion shall be a minimum negative polarization shift of 100 millivolts measured between the metallic component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth, directly over the metallic component. The polarization voltage shift shall be determined as outlined for iron and steel.

3.1.3 Copper Piping For copper piping, the following criteria shall apply: A minimum of 100 millivolts of cathodic polarization between the structure surface and a stable reference electrode contacting the electrolyte. The polarization voltage shift shall be determined as outlined for iron and steel.

3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Perform trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. In the areas of the anode beds, all trees and underbrush shall be cleared and grubbed to the limits shown or indicated. In the event rock is encountered in providing the required depth for anodes, determine an alternate approved location and, if the depth is still not provided, submit an alternate plan to the Contracting Officer. Alternate techniques and depths must be approved prior to implementation.

3.3 INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Anode Installation Unless otherwise authorized, installation shall not proceed without the presence of the Contracting Officer. Anodes of the size specified shall be installed to the depth indicated and at the locations shown. Locations may be changed to clear obstructions with the approval of the Contracting Officer. Anodes shall be installed in sufficient number and of the required type, size, and spacing to obtain a uniform current distribution over the surface of the structure. The anode system shall e designed for a life of 25 years of continuous operation. Anodes shall be installed as indicated in a dry condition after any plastic or waterproof protective covering has been completely removed from the water permeable, permanent container housing the anode metal. The anode connecting wire shall not be used for lowering the anode into the hole. The annular space around the anode shall be backfilled with fine earth in 6 inch layers and each layer shall be hand tamped. Care must be exercised not to strike the anode or connecting wire with the


tamper. Approximately 5 gallons of water shall be applied to each filled hole after anode backfilling and tamping has been completed to a point about 6 inch above the anode. After the water has been absorbed by the earth, backfilling shall be completed to the ground surface level.

3.3.1.1 Single Anodes Single anodes, spaced as shown, shall be connected through a test station to the pipeline, allowing adequate slack in the connecting wire to compensate for movement during backfill operation.

3.3.1.2 Groups of Anodes Groups of anodes, in quantity and location shown, shall be connected to an anode header cable. The anode header cable shall make contact with the structure to be protected only through a test station. Anode lead connection to the anode header cable shall be made by an approved crimp connector or exothermic weld and splice mold kit with appropriate potting compound.

3.3.1.3 Welding Methods Connections to ferrous pipe or metal tanks shall be made by exothermic weld methods manufactured for the type of pipe or tank supplied. Electric arc welded connections and other types of welded connections to ferrous pipe and structures shall be approved before use.

3.3.2 Anode Placement - General Packaged anodes shall be installed completely dry, and shall be lowered into holes by rope sling or by grasping the cloth gather. The anode lead wire shall not be used in lowering the anodes. The hole shall be backfilled with fine soil in 6 inch layers and each layer shall be hand-tamped around the anode. Care must be exercised not to strike the anode or lead wire with the tamper. If immediate testing is to be performed, water shall be added only after backfilling and tamping has been completed to a point 6 inch above the anode. Approximately 2 gallons of water may be poured into the hole. After the water has been absorbed by the soil, backfilling and tamping may be completed to the top of the hole. Anodes shall be installed as specified or shown. In the event a rock strata is encountered prior to achieving specified augered-hole depth, anodes may be installed horizontally to a depth at least as deep as the bottom of the pipe, with the approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.3.3 Underground Pipeline Anodes shall be installed at a minimum of 8 feet and a maximum of 10 feet from the line to be protected.

3.3.4 Installation Details Details shall conform to the requirements of this specification. Details shown on the drawings are indicative of the general type of material required, and are not intended to restrict selection to material of any particular manufacturer.


3.3.5 Lead Wire Connections 3.3.5.1 Underground Pipeline (Metallic) To facilitate periodic electrical measurements during the life of the sacrificial anode system and to reduce the output current of the anodes, if required, all anode lead wires shall be connected to a test station and buried a minimum of 24 inch in depth. The cable shall be No. 10 AWG, stranded copper, polyethylene or RHW-USE insulated cable. The cable shall make contact with the structure only through a test station. Resistance wire shall be installed between the cable and the pipe cable, in the test station, to reduce the current output, if required. Anode connections, except in the test station, shall be made with exothermic welding process, and shall be insulated by means of at least three (3) layers of electrical tape; and all lead wire connections shall be installed in a moistureproof splice mold kit and filled with epoxy resin. Lead wire-to-structure connections shall be accomplished by an exothermic welding process. All welds shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A backfill shield filled with a pipeline mastic sealant or material compatible with the coating shall be placed over the weld connection and shall be of such diameter as to cover the exposed metal adequately.

3.3.5.2 Resistance Wire Splices Resistance wire connections shall be accomplished with silver solder and the solder joints wrapped with a minimum of three (3) layers of pressure-sensitive tape. Lead wire connections shall be installed in a moistureproof splice mold kit and filled with epoxy resin.

3.3.6 Location of Test Stations Test stations shall be of the type and location shown and shall be curb box, post or indoor mounted as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Buried insulating joints shall be provided with test wire connections brought to a test station. Unless otherwise shown, other test stations shall be located as follows:

a. At 1,000-foot intervals or less.

b. Where the pipe or conduit crosses any other metal pipe.

c. At both ends of casings under roadways and railways.

d. Where both sides of an insulating joint are not accessible above ground for testing purposes.

3.3.7 Underground Pipe Joint Bonds Underground pipe having other than welded or threaded coupling joints shall be made electrically continuous by means of a bonding connection installed across the joint.

3.4 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION OF STRUCTURES 3.4.1 Isolation Joints and Fittings


Isolating fittings, including main line isolating flanges and couplings, shall be installed aboveground, or within manholes, wherever possible. Where isolating joints must be covered with soil, they shall be fitted with a paper joint cover specifically manufactured for covering the particular joint, and the space within the cover filled with hot coal-tar enamel. Isolating fittings in lines entering buildings shall be located at least 12 inch above grade of floor level, when possible. Isolating joints shall be provided with grounding cells to protect against over-voltage surges or approved surge protection devices. The cells shall provide a low resistance across isolating joint without excessive loss of cathodic current.

3.4.2 Gas Distribution Piping Electrical isolation shall be provided at each building riser pipe to the pressure regulator, at all points where a short to another structure or to a foreign structure may occur, and at other locations as indicated on the drawings.

3.5 TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS 3.5.1 Baseline Potentials Each test and measurement will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of five (5) working days prior to each test. After backfill of the pipe or tank, the static potential-to-soil of the pipe or tank shall be measured. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations specified for pipe- or tank-to-reference electrode potential measurements. The initial measurements shall be recorded.

3.5.2 Isolation Testing Before the anode system is connected to the pipe or tank, an isolation test shall be made at each isolating joint or fitting. This test shall demonstrate that no metallic contact, or short circuit exists between the two isolated sections of the pipe or tank. Any isolating fittings installed and found to be defective shall be reported to the Contracting Officer.

3.5.2.1 Insulation Checker A Model 601 insulation checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics", or an approved equal, using the continuity check circuit, shall be used for isolating joint (flange) electrical testing. Testing shall conform to the manufacturer's operating instructions. Test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. An isolating joint that is good will read full scale on the meter. If an isolating joint is shorted, the meter pointer will be deflected or near zero on the meter scale. Location of the fault shall be determined from the instructions, and the joint shall be repaired. If an isolating joint is located inside a vault, the pipe shall be sleeved with insulator when entering and leaving the vault.

3.5.2.2 Cathodic Protection Meter A Model B3A2 cathodic protection meter, as manufactured by "M.C. Miller", or an approved equal, using the continuity check circuit, shall be used for isolating joint (flange) electrical testing. This test shall be performed in addition to the Model 601 insulation checker. Continuity is checked


across the isolation joint after the test lead wire is shorted together and the meter adjusted to scale. A full-scale deflection indicates the system is shorted at some location. The Model 601 verifies that the particular insulation under test is good and the Model B3A2 verifies that the system is isolated. If the system is shorted, further testing shall be performed to isolate the location of the short.

3.5.3 Anode Output As the anodes or groups of anodes are connected to the pipe or tank, current output shall be measured with an approved clamp-on milliammeter, calibrated shunt with a suitable millivoltmeter or multimeter, or a low resistance ammeter. (Of the three methods, the low-resistance ammeter is the least desirable and most inaccurate. The clamp-on milliammeter is the most accurate.) The values obtained and the date, time, and location shall be recorded.

3.5.4 Reference Electrode Potential Measurements Upon completion of the installation and with the entire cathodic protection system in operation, electrode potential measurements shall be made using a copper-copper sulphate reference electrode and a potentiometer-voltmeter, or a direct-current voltmeter having an internal resistance (sensitivity) of not less than 10 megohms per volt and a full scale of 10 volts. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations used for baseline potentials. The values obtained and the date, time, and locations of measurements shall be recorded. No less than eight (8) measurements shall be made over any length of line or component. Additional measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser, with the reference electrode placed directly over the service line.

3.5.5 Location of Measurements 3.5.5.1 Piping or Conduit For coated piping or conduit, measurements shall be taken from the reference electrode located in contact with the earth, directly over the pipe. Connection to the pipe shall be made at service risers, valves, test leads, or by other means suitable for test purposes. Pipe-to-soil potential measurements shall be made at intervals not exceeding 5 feet. The Contractor may use a continuous pipe-to-soil potential profile in lieu of 5 foot interval pipe-to-soil potential measurements. Additional measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser, with the reference electrode placed directly over the service line adjacent to the riser. Potentials shall be plotted versus distance to an approved scale. Locations where potentials do not meet or exceed the criteria shall be identified and reported to the Contracting Officer's representative.

3.5.5.2 Tanks For underground tanks, at least 6 measurements shall be taken from the reference electrode located:

a. Directly over the center of the tank.

b. At a point directly over the tank and midway between each pair of anodes.


3.5.5.3 Casing Tests Before final acceptance of the installation, the electrical separation of carrier pipe from casings shall be tested and any short circuits corrected.

3.5.5.4 Interference Testing Before final acceptance of the installation, interference tests shall be made with respect to any foreign pipes and tanks in cooperation with the owner of the foreign pipes and tanks. A full report of the tests giving all details shall be made. Stray current measurements shall be performed at all isolating locations and at locations where the new pipeline crosses foreign metallic pipes; results of stray current measurements shall also be submitted for approval. The method of measurements and locations of measurements shall be submitted for approval. As a minimum, stray current measurements shall be performed at the following locations:

a. Connection point of new pipeline to existing pipeline.

b. Crossing points of new pipeline with existing lines.

3.5.5.5 Holiday Test Any damage to the protective covering during transit and handling shall be repaired before installation. After field-coating and wrapping has been applied, the entire pipe shall be inspected by an electric holiday detector with impressed current in accordance with NACE SP0188 using a full-ring, spring-type coil electrode. The holiday detector shall be equipped with a bell, buzzer, or other type of audible signal which sounds when a holiday is detected. Holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired upon detection. Occasional checks of holiday detector potential will be made by the Contracting Officer to determine suitability of the detector. Labor, materials, and equipment necessary for conducting the inspection shall be furnished by the Contractor. The coating system shall be inspected for holes, voids, cracks, and other damage during installation.

3.5.5.6 Recording Measurements All pipe- and tank-to-soil potential measurements, including initial potentials where required, shall be recorded. Locate, correct and report to the Contracting Officer any short circuits to foreign pipes and tanks encountered during checkout of the installed cathodic protection system. Pipe- and Tank-to-soil potential measurements shall be taken on as many pipes and tanks as necessary to determine the extent of protection or to locate short-circuits.

3.6 TRAINING COURSE Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total of 16 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions. At least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the


training course, the training course curriculum shall be submitted for approval, along with the proposed training date. Training shall consist of demonstration of test equipment, providing forms for test data and the tolerances which indicate that the system works.

3.7 SYSTEM TESTING Submit a report including potential measurements taken at adequately-close intervals to establish that minus 850 millivolts potential, "instant-off" potential, is provided, and that the cathodic protection is not providing interference to other foreign pipes causing damage to paint or pipes. The report shall provide a narrative describing how the criteria of protection is achieved without damaging other pipe or structures in the area.

3.8 SEEDING Seeding shall be done as directed, in all unsurfaced locations disturbed by this construction. In areas where grass cover exists, it is possible that sod can be carefully removed, watered, and stored during construction operations, and replaced after the operations are completed since it is estimated that no section of pipeline should remain uncovered for more than two (2) days. The use of sod in lieu of seeding shall require approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.9 CLEANUP The Contractor is responsible for cleanup of the construction site. All paper bags, wire clippings, etc., shall be disposed of as directed. Paper bags, wire clippings and other waste shall not be put in bell holes or anodes excavation.




SECTION 26 42 17.00 10

CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED CURRENT) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM B 418 (2006) Standard Specification for Cast and

Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes ASTM B 843 (2007) Standard Specification for Magnesium

Alloy Anodes for Cathodic Protection ASTM D 1248 (2005) Standard Specification for

Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable


IEEE C135.30 (1988) Zinc-Coated Ferrous Ground Rods for

Overhead or Underground Line Construction IEEE Std 81 (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,


NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE RP0193 (2001) External Cathodic Protection of On-

Grade Carbon Steel Storage Tank Bottoms NACE SP0169 (2007) Control of External Corrosion on

Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

NACE SP0188 (2006) Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New

Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates NACE SP0572 (2007) Design, Installation, Operation and

Maintenance of Impressed Current Deep Groundbeds



NEMA C80.1 (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel

Conduit (ERSC) NEMA TC 2 (2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl



2008 Edition

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 40 CFR 280 Technical Standards and Corrective Action

Requirements for Owners and Operators of Underground Storage Tanks (UST)

49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by

Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards 49 CFR 195 Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by

Pipeline

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 467 (2007) Standard for Grounding and Bonding

Equipment UL 506 (2000; Rev thru May 2006) Standard for

Specialty Transformers UL 510 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2005) Polyvinyl Chloride,

Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape UL 514A (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for

Metallic Outlet Boxes UL 6 (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal

Conduit-Steel 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 General Requirements

a. Provide a complete, operating impressed current cathodic protection system in accordance with NFPA 70, the applicable federal, state and local regulations, and the requirements of this contract. In addition to the minimum requirements of these specifications, construction of gas pipelines and associated cathodic protection systems shall be in compliance with 49 CFR 192 construction of hazardous liquid pipelines, and associated cathodic protection system shall be in compliance with 49 CFR 195 and construction and installation of underground fuel storage tanks and associated cathodic protection system shall be in compliance with 40 CFR 280.


b. The system includes planning, inspecting the installation, adjusting and testing cathodic protection and test system using rectifiers and impressed current anodes, supplemented with sacrificial anodes as needed, for utilities and equipment shown. The cathodic protection system shall also include cables, connectors, splices, corrosion protection test stations, ace power panels, and any other equipment required for a complete operating system providing the specified protection. The cathodic protection system includes (a) calculations for rectifier, anodes, and any recommendations for supplementing or changing the minimum design criteria to provide the specified potentials and (b) equipment, wiring, and wiring devices necessary to produce a continuous flow of direct current from anodes in the soil electrolyte to the pipe surfaces.

c. Submit Detail Drawings as specified in the Submittals paragraph. The installation shall meet the specified protection criteria for a 25 year life.

1.2.2 Contractor's Modifications The specified system is based on an impressed current system supplemented with magnesium anodes. The Contractor may modify the cathodic protection system after review of the project, site verification and analysis if the proposed modifications include the impressed current anodes and rectifiers and will provide better overall system performance. The modifications shall be fully described, shall be approved by the Contracting Officer and shall meet the following criteria. The proposed system shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "Instant Off" potential of minus 850 millivolts with reference to a saturated copper-copper sulfate reference cell on the underground metallic components of piping and/or tanks. Take resistivity measurements of the soil in the vicinity of the pipes and/or tanks and ground bed sites; based upon the measurements taken, adjust current and voltage of the rectifier as required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "Instant Off" potential between the structure being tested and the reference cell. This potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area without the "Instant Off" potential exceeding 1200 millivolts.


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings; G

Two complete hard copies and one electronic copy in AutoCAD (.dwg) format on CD or DVD of detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and material including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, results of system design calculations including soil resistivity, installation instructions and certified test data stating the maximum recommended anode current output density and the rate of gaseous production, if any, at that current density. Detail drawings shall


contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a unit.


Two complete hard copies and one electronic copy in AutoCAD (.dwg) format on CD or DVD of detail drawings showing proposed changes in location, scope or performance indicating any variations from, additions to, or clarifications of contract drawings. The drawings shall show proposed changes in anode arrangement, anode size and number, anode materials and layout details, conduit size, wire size, mounting details, wiring diagram, method for electrically isolating each pipe, and any other pertinent information to the proper installation and performance of the system.

SD-03 Product Data

Miscellaneous Materials; G

Within 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed, an itemized list of equipment and materials including item number, quantity, and manufacturer of each item. The list shall be accompanied by a description of procedures for each type of testing and adjustment, including testing of coating for thickness and holidays. Installation of materials and equipment shall not commence until this submittal is approved.

Spare Parts

Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified.

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests and Measurements

Test reports in booklet form tabulating field tests and measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system and including close interval potential survey, casing and interference tests, final system test verifying protection, insulated joint and bond tests, and holiday coating test. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.


Final report regarding supplemental magnesium anode installation. The report shall include pipe-to-soil measurements throughout the affected area, indicating that the additions corrected the conditions which made the additional anodes necessary, and current measurements for the additional anodes. The following special materials and information are required: Calculations on current and voltage for rectifier plus rectifier and meter specifications; taping materials and conductors; zinc grounding cell, installation and testing procedures, and equipment; coating material; system


design calculations for rectifier, anode number, life, and parameters to achieve protective potential; backfill shield material and installation details showing waterproofing; bonding and waterproofing details; insulated resistance wire; exothermic weld equipment and material.

SD-07 Certificates

Tests and Measurements

A certified test report showing that the connecting method has passed a 120-day laboratory test without failure at the place of connection, wherein the anode is subjected to maximum recommended current output while immersed in a 3 percent sodium chloride solution.


Proof that the materials and equipment furnished under this section conform to the specified requirements contained in the referenced standards or publications. The label or listing by the specified agency will be acceptable evidence of such compliance.

Services of "Corrosion Expert"; G

The "corrosion expert's" name and qualifications certified in writing to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction, including the name of the firm, the number of years of experience, and a list of not less than five of the firm's installations three or more years old that have been tested and found satisfactory..



Two complete hard copies and one electronic copy in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format on CD or DVD of operating manual outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, adjustment of current flow, and shutdown. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Two complete hard copies and one electronic copy in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format on CD or DVD of maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, recommendation for maintenance testing, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The manuals shall include single line diagrams for the system as installed; instructions in making pipe- and tank-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of monitoring; instructions for dielectric connections, interference and sacrificial anode bonds; instructions shall include precautions to ensure safe conditions during repair of pipe system.

Training Course

The proposed Training Course Curriculum (including topics and dates of discussion) indicating that all of the items contained in


the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions, are to be covered.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Services of "Corrosion Expert" Obtain the services of a "corrosion expert" to supervise, inspect, and test the installation and performance of the cathodic protection system. "Corrosion expert" refers to a person, who, by reason of thorough knowledge of the physical sciences and the principles of engineering and mathematics, acquired by professional education and related practical experience, is qualified to engage in the practice of corrosion control of buried metallic piping and tank systems. Such a person shall be accredited or certified by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as a NACE Accredited Corrosion Specialist or a NACE certified Cathodic Protection (CP) Specialist or be a registered professional engineer who has certification or licensing that includes education and experience in corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic piping and tank systems, if such certification or licensing includes 5 years experience in corrosion control on underground metallic surfaces of the type under this contract. The "corrosion expert" shall make at least 3 visits to the project site. The first of these visits shall include obtaining soil resistivity data, acknowledging the type of pipeline coatings to be used and reporting to the Contractor the type of cathodic protection required. Once the submittals are approved and the materials delivered, the "corrosion expert" shall revisit the site to ensure the Contractor understands installation practices and laying out the components. The third visit shall involve testing the installed cathodic protection systems and training applicable personnel on proper maintenance techniques. The "corrosion expert" shall supervise installation and testing of all cathodic protection.

1.4.2 Isolators Isolators are required to isolate the indicated pipes from any other structure. Isolators shall be provided with lightning protection and a test station as shown.

1.4.3 Anodes and Bond Wires Install anodes in sufficient number and of the required type, size and spacing to obtain a uniform current distribution of 2.5 milliamperes per square foot minimum to underground metal surfaces. For each cathodic protection system, the metallic components and structures to be protected shall be made electrically continuous. This shall be accomplished by installing bond wires between the various structures. Bonding of existing buried structures may also be required to preclude detrimental stray current effects and safety hazards. Provisions shall be included to return stray current to its source without damaging structures intercepting the stray current. The electrical isolation of underground facilities in accordance with acceptable industry practice shall be included under this section.

1.4.4 Surge Protection


Install approved zinc grounding cells or sealed weatherproof lightning arrestor devices across insulated flanges or fittings installed in underground piping as indicated on the drawings. The arrestor shall be gapless, self-healing, solid state type. Zinc anode composition shall conform to ASTM B 418, Type II. Lead wires shall be number 6 AWG copper with high molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation. The zinc grounding cells shall not be prepackaged in backfill but shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Lightning arrestors or zinc grounding cells are not required for insulated flanges on metallic components used on nonmetallic piping systems.

1.4.5 Sacrificial Anodes Locate sacrificial high potential magnesium anodes as required to provide localized cathodic protection or supplemental cathodic protection for the impressed current system. Each sacrificial magnesium anode shall be routed through a test station. The magnesium anode shall not be connected to the pipe.

1.4.6 Nonmetallic Pipe Systems When nonmetallic pipe is approved, direct buried or submerged metallic components of the pipe system shall have cathodic protection. Metallic components are connectors, tees, fire hydrants, valves, short pipes, elbows, tie rods, or other metallic equipment. As a minimum, each metallic component shall be protected with a 9 lb magnesium anode connected through a test station. The use of nonmetallic pipe does not change other requirements of the specifications such as submittals, testing, or design calculations for each metallic component. Deviations due to the use of nonmetallic pipe shall be approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.4.6.1 Coatings Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings. Protective covering (coating and taping) shall be completed and tested on each metallic component and shall be as required for underground metallic pipe. Mechanical joints and fittings of either the electrically conductive or insulating type shall be coated with an underground type dielectric coating system. Where external electrical continuity bonds are installed across mechanical joints, bare or exposed metal, welds, bare wire and exposed coupling parts shall be coated with a coating system.

a. Couplings and fittings which have a low profile exterior designed to permit tape coating shall be primed and wrapped with an underground type pipe tape system or two-part epoxy system.

b. Couplings and fittings that cannot be properly taped shall be enclosed in a spaced mold manufactured for the purpose and filled with cold applied dielectric compound or hot applied bituminous compound not exceeding 275 degrees F in application temperature.

1.4.6.2 Tracer Wire When a nonmetallic pipe line is used to extend or add to an existing metallic line, an insulated No. 8 AWG copper wire shall be connected to a terminal in a test station located at each point of transition from metallic pipe to nonmetallic pipe. At each of these test stations, the tracer wire


terminal shall be strapped or bonded to the terminal for the negative connection wire to the existing metallic line. The tracer wire shall be run the length of the new nonmetallic line. This wire shall be used as a locator tracer wire and to maintain continuity to any future extension of the pipe line.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Storage for magnesium anodes will be designated by the Contracting Officer. If anodes are not stored in a building, protect them from inclement weather. Packaged anodes damaged as result of improper handling or weather exposure shall be resacked and the required backfill added.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than two months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. Include in the data a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. Furnish one spare anode of each type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IMPRESSED CURRENT ANODES 2.1.1 Bare High Silicon Cast-Iron Anodes Cast-iron anodes shall be of the size indicated and shall conform to the following requirements:

2.1.1.1 Chemical Composition (Nominal) Percent by Weight Element Grade 2 Silicon 14.20-14.75 Manganese 1.50 Max. Carbon 0.75-1.15 Chromium 3.25-5.00 Iron Balance 2.1.1.2 Electrical Resistivity Seventy-two microhm-centimeter at 20 degrees F.

2.1.1.3 Physical Properties (Nominal)

Tensile strength 15,000 psi Compressive strength 100,000 psi Brinell hardness 520 Density 7.0 grams per cubic centimeter Melting point 2300 degrees F Coefficient of 0.00000733 centimeter expansion from 32 per degree F to 212 degrees F


2.1.2 Bare Graphite Anodes Bare graphite anodes shall have a maximum electrical resistivity of 0.0011 ohm-centimeter.

2.1.3 Canister Contained Anodes Canister contained anodes shall be packed at the factory in sheet metal canisters with calcined petroleum coke breeze. The coke shall have a resistivity of 0.1 ohm-cm tested at 150 psi. The coke shall be 70 lbs/cubic foot or greater. The maximum particle size shall be 0.039 inch and the coke shall be dust-free. The canisters shall be capped with tight fitting end caps secured to the body of the canister. The canister shall provide a minimum annular space of 3 inch all around the anode. The connecting cable shall pass through a hole in an end cap designed to be tight fitting with the cable and protected from sharp edges with a plastic or rubber grommet. The anodes shall be centered in the canisters and the annular space filled with coke breeze compacted in place.

2.1.4 Anode Connecting Cables Anodes shall have connecting cables installed at the factory. For deep ground beds, each anode located in the borehole shall be accompanied by a reel of continuous cable having the length indicated. No spliced connections will be permitted in deep well cables.

2.1.5 Mixed Metal Oxide Anodes Mixed metal oxide anodes shall be of the size indicated and shall conform to the following requirements.

2.1.5.1 Conductive Material The electrically conductive coating shall contain a mixture consisting primarily of iridium, tantalum, and titanium oxides. The average composition is generally a 50/50 atomic percent mixture of iridium and titanium oxides, with a small amount of tantalum. The resistivity, as tested by the manufacturer, shall be no more than 0.002 ohm-centimeter, and the bond strength shall be greater than 7.25 ksi to guarantee the current capacity life and the quality of the conductive ceramic coating. The adhesion or bond strength shall be determined by epoxy bonding a 0.1 inch diameter stud to the ceramic coating and measuring the load to failure (about 10.15 ksi) of either the epoxy or the interface between the coating and the substrate. The anode must be inert and the electrically conductive ceramic coating dimensionally stable. The ceramic coated anode shall be capable of sustaining a current density of 100 ampere per 10.764 square feet in an oxygen generating electrolyte at 150 degrees F for 20 years, to ensure the current capacity life. An accelerated current capacity life test shall be performed by the manufacturer on every lot of anode wire used to construct the anode as described. The mixed metal oxide coating shall be applied to the wire anode by a firm that is regularly engaged in and has a minimum 5 years experience in manufacturing and applying mixed metal oxide coatings to titanium anode substrates. The mixed metal oxide must be sintered to the titanium surface as to remain tightly bound to the surface when bent 180 degrees onto itself.


2.1.5.2 Anode Life Test The anode wire material shall sustain current densities of 100 ampere per 10.764 square feet in an oxygen generating electrolyte for 20 years. The manufacturer shall certify that a representative sample taken from the same lot used to construct the anode, has been tested and meets the following criteria. The test cell sustains a current density of 10,000 ampere per 10.764 square feet in a 15 weight percent sulfuric acid electrolyte at 150 degrees F without an increase in anode to cathode potential of more than 1 volt. The cell containing the anode shall be powered with a constant current power supply for the 30 day test period. The representative sample shall be 5 inch in length taken from the lot of wire that is to be used for the anode.

2.1.5.3 Canister Contained Mixed Metal Oxide Anodes Canister contained mixed metal oxide anodes shall be packed at the factory in light weight, light gauge steel uni-body TIG welded canisters with calcinated petroleum coke breeze. The canisters shall be capped with TIG welded steel and caps providing a totally encapsulated construction. The connecting cable shall pass through a hole in an end cap designed to be tight fitting with a heavy duty strain relief allowing for handling of the canister by the cable. The anode shall be centered in the canister by centralizers to maintain rod position.

2.1.5.4 Anode Connecting Cables Anodes shall have connecting cables installed at the factory. The connection between the anode rod or ribbon and the lead wire shall be made with a solid crimp couple with solder. The connection shall be sealed in cast epoxy.

2.1.5.5 Canister Connection Cables Canister connecting cables shall consist of an ultra low resistance solder connection which is a minimum of three times stronger than the cable. For ceramic coated canister anodes, the cable connection shall consist of two molded dielectric layers (pressure seals), a flexible backfill resin encapsulant stabilizer, a schedule 40 PVC pipe Type 1 seal, and Type 1 PVC pipe end plugs. The seals and end plugs shall resist chlorine gas and acid.

2.1.5.6 Deep Anode Connection Cables For deep anode beds, each anode located in the borehole shall be accompanied by a reel of continuous cable having the length indicated. For deep ceramic coated anode beds, anode connecting cables shall have molded multiseal solder connections; splices will not be permitted. Chlorine gas resistant cable and shield shall be used for chlorine environments.

2.2 RECTIFIERS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 2.2.1 Rectifier Unit Rectifier unit shall consist of a transformer, rectifying elements, transformer tap adjuster, terminal block, one dc output voltmeter and one dc output ammeter or one combination volt-ammeter, one toggle switch for each meter, fuse holders with fuses for each dc circuit, variable resistors, an


ac power-supply circuit breaker, lightning arresters for both input and output, all wired and assembled in a weatherproof cabinet. The overall efficiency of the rectifier shall be not less than 65 percent when operated at nameplate rating and shall be capable of supplying continuous full rated output at an ambient temperature of 112 degrees F in full sunlight with expected life in excess of 10 years.

2.2.1.1 Transformer Transformer shall conform to UL 506.

2.2.1.2 Rectifiers Rectifying elements shall be silicon diodes or selenium cells connected to provide full-wave rectification. Silicon diodes shall be protected by selenium surge cells or varistors against over-voltage surges and by current-limiting devices against over-current surges.

2.2.1.3 Meters Meters shall be accurate to within plus or minus 2 percent of full scale at 80 degrees F, and shall possess temperature stability above and below 80 degrees F and shall possess temperature stability above and below 80 degrees F of at least 1 percent per 10 degrees F. Separate meters shall be 2-1/2 inch nominal size or larger.

2.2.1.4 Circuit Breaker A flush-mounted, fully magnetic, properly rated non-terminal type circuit breaker shall be installed in the primary circuit of the rectifier supply transformer.

2.2.1.5 Fuses Cartridge-type fuses with suitable fuse holders shall be provided in each leg of the dc circuit.

2.2.2 Cabinet Construction Cabinet shall be constructed of not lighter than 16 gauge steel, hot dipped galvanized steel, stainless steel, or aluminum, or of molded fiberglass reinforced polyester as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, and shall be provided with a full door. The enclosure shall have oil-resistant gasket. The door shall be hinged and have a hasp that will permit the use of a padlock. The cabinet shall be fitted with screened openings of the proper size to provide for adequate cooling. Holes, conduit knockouts, or threaded hubs of sufficient size and number shall be conveniently located.

2.2.2.1 Wiring Diagram A complete wiring diagram of the power unit showing both the ac supply and the dc connections to anodes shall be on the inside of the cabinet door. All components shall be shown and labeled.

2.2.2.2 Grounding Provisions


Grounding provisions shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and shall comply with NFPA 70 and UL 467 including a ground terminal in the cabinet. The grounding conductor from the terminal to the earth grounding system shall be solid or stranded copper not smaller than No. 6 AWG. The earth grounding system shall consist of one or more ground rods. Ground rods shall be of copper-clad steel conforming to UL 467 zinc-coated steel conforming to IEEE C135.30 or solid stainless steel not less than 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Rods shall be driven full length into the earth. Sectional type rods may be used.

2.2.2.3 Resistance to Ground The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Std 81. The maximum resistance of driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers, or if sectional type rods are used, additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. In high-ground-resistance, UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. Connections below grade shall be fusion welded. Connections above grade shall be fusion welded or shall use UL 467 approved connectors.

2.2.2.4 Cabinet Paint System The cabinet and mounting support shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. The mounting support for fiberglass cabinets shall be hot dipped galvanized or stainless steel with the manufacturer's standard painting system.

2.2.3 Wiring Wiring shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 utilizing type TW or RHW or polyethylene insulation. Fittings for conduit and cable work shall conform to UL 514A. Outlets shall be of the threaded hub type with gasketed covers. Conduit shall be hub type with gasketed covers. Conduit shall be securely fastened at 8 foot intervals or less. Splices shall be made in outlet fittings only. Conductors shall be color coded for identification. Cable for anode header and distribution shall be No. 2 AWG stranded copper wire with type cathodic protection high molecular weight polyethylene or Dular/Halar insulation.

2.2.4 Oil Immersed Enclosures Enclosures shall be of 11 gauge steel or heavier, with an accessible drain plug. The oil level shall be clearly marked. The lid shall be hinged and have quick release clamps to secure it in closed position. A stop shall limit the swing of the lid when opened. A compressible, oil resistant, positive sealing gasket shall be provided. The gasket shall return to its original shape upon release of lid pressure. The gasket shall be attached to the tank or lid and joints shall be free of gaps. Base mounting using 4 inch high channels shall be provided. Conduits entering the enclosure shall be internally sealed and shall enter or exit above the oil fill line.

2.3 COKE BREEZE


2.3.1 Calcined Petroleum Coke Breeze (Dry) Breeze shall conform to the following requirements:

2.3.1.1 Electrical Resistivity Resistivity shall not exceed 1 milliohm-meter (0.1 ohm-cm) Great Lake Carbon C 12 A Test Method.

2.3.1.2 General Backfill Specifications Bulk Density - 65 to 75 lbs/cubic foot Fixed Carbon - 99.0 percent or greater Volatiles - 0.2 percent or less Sizing - 100 percent less than 1/2 inch

2.3.2 Metallurgical Coke Breeze (Processed) Breeze shall conform to the following requirements:

2.3.2.1 Electrical Resistivity (Nominal) Nominal electrical resistivity shall be:

a. 100 milliohm-meter (10 ohm-centimeter) Max., tightly compacted.

b. 100 milliohm-meter to 150 milliohm-meter, (10 to 15 ohm-centimeter,) lightly compacted.

c. 150 to 200 milliohm-meter, (15 to 20 ohm-centimeter,) loose.

2.3.2.2 General Backfill Specifications Bulk density - 38 to 42 pounds per cubic foot Fixed Carbon - 80 percent or greater Sizing - 100 percent less than 3/8 inch

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 2.4.1 Electrical Wire 2.4.1.1 Anode Connecting Wire Anode connecting wire shall be No. 8 AWG stranded copper wire with type CP high molecular weight polyethylene insulation, 7/64 inch thick, 600 volt rating. Cable-to-anode contact resistance shall be 0.003 ohms maximum. Deep anode ground bed connecting wire shall be No. 8 AWG, stranded copper wire with an inner jacket of 40 mils of Halar insulation covered by an outer jacket of 65 mils CP high molecular weight polyethylene insulation, 600 volt rating. Cable-to-anode contact resistance shall be 0.02 ohms maximum.

2.4.1.2 Anode Header Cable Cable for anode header and distribution shall be stranded copper wire with type CP high molecular weight polyethylene, 7/64 inch thick insulation or HMWPE protective jacketed cable with a fluorocopolymer inner or primary insulation, 600-volt rating, AWG as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.


2.4.1.3 Test Wires Test wires shall be No. 12 AWG stranded copper wire with NFPA 70 Type TW or RHW or polyethylene insulation.

2.4.1.4 Resistance Wire Resistance wire shall be AWG No. 16 or No. 22 nickel-chromium wire.

2.4.2 Deep Anode Ground Bed Casing Casing shall have an outside diameter as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, 1/8 inch minimum wall thickness black steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. The top casing shall have an outside diameter as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, 1/8 inch minimum wall thickness black steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. The metal casing shall extend no more than 5 feet below the top of a well cap.

2.4.3 Anode Centering Device for Deep Anode Ground Beds Anode centering device shall be nonmetallic and capable of maintaining centering in the hole without interfering with other anode lead wiring, until coke breeze is packed in place.

2.4.4 Conduit Nonmetallic conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 2.

2.4.5 Test Boxes and Junction Boxes Boxes shall be outdoor type conforming to UL 514A.

2.4.6 Vent Pipes All deep wells shall be vented in anode zones. Openings in the vent shall not be larger than 0.006 inch.

2.4.7 Polyethylene Insulation Polyethylene insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D 1248 and of the following types, classes, and grades:

2.4.7.1 High Molecular Weight Polyethylene High molecular weight polyethylene shall be Type I, Class C, Grade E5.

2.4.7.2 High Density Polyethylene High density polyethylene shall be Type III, Class C, Grade E3.

2.4.8 Test Stations Provide test stations complete with an insulated terminal block having the indicated number of terminals; provided with a lockable cover and have a cast-in legend, "C.P. Test" and complete with an insulated terminal block


having the required number of terminals. (One terminal required for each conductor). Provide sufficient test stations to monitor underground isolation points. Test-bond stations (potential measurement and stray current control) shall be provided to monitor pipe to soil potential of proposed underground pipes or existing underground metallic structures which may conduct stray current from the new cathodic protection system. The location of the test-bond stations shall ensure that the pipe to soil potential of metallic pipe not designated to be protected is not made less negative by the energization of the cathodic protection system. Test station terminal connections and the terminal conductor shall be permanently tagged to identify each termination of the conductors (e.g. identify the conductors connected to the protected structures). Conductors shall be permanently identified in the station by means of plastic or metal tags, or plastic sleeves to indicate termination. Each conductor shall be color coded in accordance with the drawings. The station test facility, including permanent Cu-Cu S04 reference cells and test returns shall be installed as indicated. Pavement inserts shall be nonmetallic and shall allow Cu-Cu S04 reference electrode to contact the electrolyte beneath the pavement surface. Abbreviations shall not be used. Welding of electrical connections shall be as follows: Exothermic welds shall be "CADweld", "Thermo-weld", or approved equal. Use and selection of these materials and welding equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2.4.9 Calibrated Shunts Install shunts calibrated in current per potential (e.g. mA/V) between the lead or header wire connected to the anode and the current collector lead connected to the structure. The calibration of the shunt shall be clearly marked and installed to be visible.

2.4.10 Sealing and Dielectric Compound Sealing and dielectric compound shall be a black, rubber based compound that is soft, permanently pliable, tacky, moldable, and unbacked. Apply compound as recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 1/8 inch thick.

2.4.11 Protective Covering Except as otherwise specified, protective covering for underground metallic components including pipe and fittings shall be applied mechanically in a factory or field plant specially equipped for the purpose. Valves and fittings that cannot be coated and wrapped mechanically shall have the protective covering applied by hand, preferably at the plant applying the covering to the pipe. Joints shall be coated and wrapped by hand. Hand coating and wrapping shall produce a covering equal in thickness to the covering applied mechanically. Piping and components installed in valve boxes or manholes shall also receive the specified protective coating.

2.4.11.1 Pipeline Metallic Components Underground metallic pipelines and structures shall have a good quality factory applied coating. This includes carbon steel, cast iron and ductile iron pipelines or vessels. If nonmetallic pipelines are installed, metallic fittings or pipe sections shall be coated as follows.


a. The nominal thickness of the metallic pipe joint or other component coating shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, plus or minus 5 percent.

b. Pipe and joint coating for factory applied or field repair material shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be one of the following:

(1) Continuously extruded polyethylene and adhesive coating system.

(2) Polyvinyl chloride pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

(3) High density polyethylene/bituminous rubber compound tape.

(4) Butyl rubber tape.

(5) Coal tar epoxy.

2.4.11.2 Field Joints Coat field joints with material compatible with the pipeline coating compound. Apply the joint coating material to an equal thickness as the pipeline coating. Unbonded coatings shall not be used on buried metallic piping. This prohibition includes unbonded polymer wraps or tubes.

2.4.11.3 Inspection of Pipe Coatings Once the pipeline or vessel is set in the trench, conduct an inspection of the coating including electrical holiday detection as described in paragraph TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS.

2.4.11.4 Above Ground Piping System Above ground piping shall be given two coats of exterior oil paint. Surface preparation shall be as recommended by paint manufacturer, except as follows: ferrous, shop primed surfaces shall be touched up with ferrous metal primer; surfaces that have not been shop primed shall be solvent cleaned; surfaces that contain loose rust, mil scale, or other foreign substances shall be mechanically cleaned by power wire brushing and primed with ferrous metal primer; and primed surfaces shall be finished with two coats of exterior oil paint or vinyl paint.

2.4.12 Preformed Sheaths Preformed sheaths for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall fit the insulated wires entering the spliced joint.

2.4.13 Epoxy Potting Compound Epoxy potting compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall be a two package system made for the purpose.

2.4.14 Backfill Shields


Backfill shields shall consist of approved pipeline wrapping or fiberglass reinforced, coal-tar impregnated tape, or plastic weld caps, specifically made for the purpose.

2.4.15 Electrical Tape Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510.

2.4.16 Cable Marker Tape Traceable marker tape shall be manufactured for the purpose and clearly labeled "Cathodic Protection Cable Buried Below".

2.4.17 Electrically Isolating Pipe Joints Electrically isolating pipe joints for above or below ground use shall include the following: flexible, mechanical pipe couplings of an electrically isolating type consisting of bolted or compression design provided with electrically isolating joint harness if required to provide pull-out strength; flexible, integral electrically isolating pipe couplings designed for field installation by means of a swaging system and providing pull-out strength with a factor of safety; nonflexible flanged type electrically isolating pipe joints to be field assembled; and nonflexible factory assembled electrically isolating pipe joints designed with stub ends for installation by welding and providing pull-out strength with a factor of safety.

2.4.17.1 Threaded Fittings Threaded type electrically isolating pipe joints shall have molded plastic screw threads and be used above ground only. Machined plastic screw threads shall not be used.

2.4.17.2 Electrically Isolating Pipe Joints Electrically isolating pipe joints shall be of a type that is in regular factory production.

2.4.18 Electrically Conductive Couplings Electrically conductive couplings shall be of a type that has a published maximum electrical resistance rating given in the manufacturer's literature. Cradles and seals shall be of a type that is in regular factory production made for the purpose of electrically isolating the carrier pipe from the casing and preventing the incursion of water into the annular space.

2.4.19 Joint and Continuity Bonds Provide bonds across joints or any electrically discontinuous connections in the piping, and other pipes and structures with other than welded or threaded joints included in this cathodic protection system. Unless otherwise specified, bonds between structures and across joints in pipe with other than welded or threaded joints shall be with No. 4 AWG stranded copper cable with polyethylene insulation. Bonds between structures shall contain sufficient slack for any anticipated movement between structures. Bonds across pipe joints shall contain a minimum of 4 inch of slack to allow for pipe movement and soil stress. Bonds shall be attached by exothermic


welding. Exothermic weld areas shall be insulated with coating compound and approved by the Contracting Officer. Continuity bonds shall be installed as necessary to reduce stray current interference. Additional joint bonding shall be done where determined during construction or testing or as directed. Joint bonding shall include excavation and backfilling. There shall be a minimum of 2 continuity bonds between each structure and other than welded or threaded joints. Electrical continuity shall be tested across joints with other than welded or threaded joints and across metallic portions of sewage lift stations and water booster stations.

2.4.19.1 Resistance Bonds Resistance bonds shall be adjusted for minimum interference while achieving the criteria of protection. Alternate methods may be used when approved.

2.4.19.2 Stray Current Measurements Perform stray current measurements as indicated. Alternate methods may be used when approved. The stray current test report shall indicate location of test, type of pipes tested, and method of testing.

2.4.20 Electrical Isolation of Structures Isolating fittings, including isolating flanges and couplings, shall be installed above ground or in a concrete hand hole. As a minimum, isolating flanges or unions shall be provided at the following locations:

a. Connection of new piping to existing pipes.

b. Pressure piping under floor slab to a building.

Additionally, isolation shall be provided between new pipe lines and foreign pipes that cross the new lines within 10 feet.

2.5 MAGNESIUM ANODES Weights and dimensions of magnesium anodes shall be approximately as follows:

TYPICAL MAGNESIUM ANODE SIZES

(Cross sections may be round, square, or D shaped) NOMINAL GROSS NOMINAL APPROX. WT LBS PACKAGED NOMINAL PACKAGE WT. LBS. SIZE (IN) IN BACKFILL DIMENSIONS (IN) 3 3 X 3 X 5 8 5 1/4 X 5 1/4 X 8 5 3 X 3 X 8 13 5 1/4 X 5 1/4 X 11 1/4 9 3 X 3 X 14 27 5 1/4 X 20 12 4 X 4 X 12 32 7 1/2 X 18 17 4 X 4 X 17 45 7 1/2 X 24 32 5 X 5 X 20 1/2 68 8 1/2 X 28 50 7 X 7 X 16 100 10 X 24 2.5.1 Composition


Anode shall be of high potential magnesium alloy, made of primary magnesium obtained from sea water or brine, and not from scrap metal. Magnesium anodes shall conform to ASTM B 843 and to the following analysis unless otherwise indicated:

Element Percent by Weight Aluminum 0.02 maximum Manganese 1.50 maximum Zinc 0.05 Silicon 0.10 maximum Copper 0.02 maximum Nickel 0.002 maximum Iron 0.03 maximum Impurities 0.30 maximum Magnesium Remainder Furnish spectrographic analyses on samples from each heat or batch of anodes used on this project.

2.5.2 Packaged Anodes Provide anodes in packaged form with the anode surrounded by specially prepared quick-wetting backfill and contained in a cloth or paper sack. Anodes shall be centered in the backfill material. The backfill material shall have the following composition, unless otherwise indicated.

Material Percent by Weight Gypsum 75 Bentonite 20 Sodium Sulfate 5 2.5.3 Lead Wires Anode lead wires shall consist of No. 10 solid copper wire, with TW insulation. Lead wires shall be not less than 10 feet in length, without splices.

2.5.4 Connection Wires Wires shall consist of No. 10 solid copper wire with RHW-USE or polyethylene insulation.

2.5.5 Insulation Type RHW-USE insulation shall comply with NFPA 70. Polyethylene insulation shall comply with ASTM D 1248; high molecular weight polyethylene shall be Type I, Class C, Grade E5; high density polyethylene shall be Type III, Class C, Grade E3.

2.5.6 Conduit Steel Conduit steel shall conform to UL 6 and NEMA C80.1.

2.5.7 Tape


Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510. 2.5.8 Backfill Shields Provide shields consisting of approved wrapping of reinforced fiberglass coal-tar impregnated tape, or plastic weld caps specifically made for the purpose and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When joint bonds are required, due to the use of mechanical joints, the entire joint shall be protected with kraft paper joint cover. The joint cover shall be filled with poured hot coal-tar enamel.

2.5.9 Electrical Connections Electrical connections shall be done as follows:

a. Exothermic welds shall be "Cadweld", Burndy "Thermo-Weld" or approved equal. Use of these materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

b. Electrical shielded arc welds on steel pipe shall be approved via shop drawing action.

c. Other methods of welding shall be specifically approved for use by the pipe manufacturer.

2.5.10 Anode Installation Anode configuration and size shall be as indicated. The number of anodes required to achieve minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order and shall be required on the components or structure. Details shown are indicative of the general type of material required and are not intended to restrict selection of materials or of any particular manufacturer. The anode system shall be designed for a life of 25 years of continuous operation.

2.6 LEAD WIRE CONNECTIONS Lead wire to structure connections shall be by exothermic welding process. Weld charges made specifically for use on cast iron shall be used on cast iron pipe. A backfill shield filled with a pipeline mastic sealant or material compatible with the coating shall be placed over the weld connection and shall cover the exposed metal adequately.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CRITERIA OF PROTECTION Acceptance criteria for determining the adequacy of protection on a buried pipe or tank shall be in accordance with NACE SP0169, and NACE RP0193, and as specified below.

3.1.1 Iron and Steel Use the following method a. for testing cathodic protection voltages. If more than one method is required, use method b.


a. A negative voltage of at least minus 850 millivolts as measured between the pipe, tank or specified underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the (electrolyte) earth directly over the pipe, tank or specified underground component. Determination of this voltage shall be made with the cathodic protection system in operation. Voltage drops shall be considered for valid interpretation of this voltage measurement. A minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the structure, pipe, tank, or specified underground component being tested and the reference cell shall be achieved over 95 percent of the area of the structure. Obtain adequate number of measurements over the entire structure, pipe, tank, or other metallic component to verify and record achievement of minus 850 millivolts "instant off". This potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the total metallic area without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1200 millivolts.

b. A minimum polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts as measured between the pipe or tank and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth directly over the pipe or tank. This polarization voltage shift shall be determined by interrupting the protective current and measuring the polarization decay. When the protective current is interrupted, an immediate voltage shift will occur. The voltage reading, after the immediate shift, shall be used as the base reading from which to measure polarization decay. Measurements achieving 100 millivolts shall be made over 95 percent of the metallic surface.

3.1.2 Aluminum Aluminum pipes or tanks shall not be protected to a potential more negative than minus 1200 millivolts, measured between the pipe or tank and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth, directly over the pipe, tank or metallic component. Resistance, if required, shall be inserted in the anode circuit within the test station to reduce the potential of the aluminum pipe or tank to a value which will not exceed a potential more negative than minus 1200 millivolts. Voltage shift criterion shall be a minimum negative polarization shift of 100 millivolts measured between the pipe, tank or metallic component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth, directly over the pipe or tank. The polarization voltage shift shall be determined as outlined for iron and steel.

3.1.3 Copper Piping For copper piping the following criteria shall apply. A minimum of 100 millivolts of cathodic polarization between the structure surface and a stable reference electrode contacting the electrolyte. The polarization voltage shift shall be determined as outlined for iron and steel.

3.2 GROUND BED INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Shallow Ground Beds Shallow ground beds shall contain size and quantity of anodes designed to meet performance criteria of the cathodic protection system at an initial operating current output density not exceeding 50 percent of maximum recommended current output density.


3.2.1.1 Horizontally Buried Bare Anodes Horizontally buried bare anodes shall be bedded on and covered with metallurgical coke breeze in a trench excavated for the purpose at depths, spacing and locations as shown. Anodes shall be completely surrounded by the backfill at bottom, sides, and top for a distance of not less than 4 inch. Backfill shall be compacted.

3.2.1.2 Vertically Buried Bare Anodes Vertically buried bare anodes shall be installed in vertical holes in the ground having a depth, spacing, and location shown. The holes in the ground shall be sufficiently large to provide an annular space around the anode not less than 4 inch. The anodes shall be centered in the hole and backfilled with calcined petroleum coke breeze or metallurgical coke breeze. Backfill shall be compacted.

3.2.1.3 Horizontally Buried Canister-Contained Anodes Horizontally buried canister-contained anodes shall be buried in a trench excavated for the purpose at depths, spacing, and locations shown.

3.2.1.4 Vertically Buried Canister-Contained Anodes Vertically buried canister-contained anodes shall be installed in vertical holes in the ground having depth, spacing, and locations shown. The holes in the ground shall be sufficiently larger in diameter than the canisters to facilitate easy lowering into the hole and backfilling. The space between the canister and the wall of the hole shall be completely backfilled with a wet slurry of earth free of stones.

3.2.1.5 Cable Protection Positive cable to the ground bed and negative cable to the pipe or tank to be protected shall be buried a minimum depth of 30 inch except where above ground construction utilizing conduit is used.

3.2.1.6 Multiple Anode Systems Multiple anode systems shall consist of groups of anodes connected in parallel to a header cable, buried in the ground at depths, spacing, and locations shown. The anodes shall be buried either horizontally or vertically.

3.2.1.7 Distributed Anode Systems Distributed anode systems shall consist of a line or row of anodes connected in parallel to a header cable and buried in the ground parallel to the pipeline. The anodes shall be at the pipeline at depths, spacing, and locations shown. The anodes shall be buried either horizontally or vertically.

3.2.2 Deep Anode Ground Beds Deep anode ground beds shall consist of an installation of anodes supported one above the other and supported in place by a method that does not suspend


the anodes from the connecting cable. Deep anode ground beds shall be installed in accordance with NACE SP0572 and as specified in these specifications.

3.2.2.1 Anode Centering Anodes shall be centered in the well by means of centering devices.

3.2.2.2 Casing The casing shall be to a depth and elevation as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

3.2.2.3 Casing Insulation The portion of casing above the top anode shall be coated with an electrically insulating underground type coating.

3.2.2.4 Anode Requirements Anode sizes, spacing, number of anodes, depth of well, and other details shall be as shown.

3.2.2.5 Anode Lead Wire Each anode shall have a separate, continuous wire extending from the anode to the junction box at the well head.

3.2.2.6 Anode Cables Anode cables shall terminate in a nearby junction box, equipped with individual anode current shunts. Where full length casing is used, two wire connections from casing shall terminate in the junction box.

3.2.2.7 Anode and Cable Installation If the method of installation utilizes backfill support for anodes and cable, provide slack in the cable near each anode and increase the cable insulation in thickness from 7/64 to 5/32 inch utilizing an approved composite of plastic and elastomeric materials.

3.2.2.8 Backfill Backfill the well with calcined petroleum coke breeze or metallurgical coke breeze surrounding the anodes by a method that does not leave voids or bridging. The recommended method is to pump the backfill from the bottom upward. The well shall be over-filled with coke breeze allowing for settlement so that the settled level after a number of days is as high as the level shown. The number of days allowed for settling of the coke breeze will be determined by the Contracting Officer. If the top level of coke breeze is below the level shown after settlement, put additional coke breeze in the well. The backfill used shall not require tamping. The top portion of the well shall be sealed for 25 feet to prevent surface water run-off. All vents shall be vented above the high water mark and at a safe height.

3.2.2.9 Cable Marker Tape


Locate traceable marker tape in the same trench above cathodic protection cables including structure leads, anode leads, anode header cables, test station leads, bonding cables, and rectifier electrical power cables.

3.2.2.10 Pavement Inserts Install pavement inserts at a minimum of 100 foot intervals for pipelines. The pavement inserts shall be installed directly over the structure being protected and tested.

3.3 MAGNESIUM ANODE INSTALLATION Installation shall not proceed without the presence of the Contracting Officer, unless otherwise authorized. Anode locations may be changed to clear obstructions when approved. Install anodes in sufficient number and of the required type, size, and spacing to obtain a uniform current distribution surface on the structure. Prepackaged anodes shall be installed as shown on the drawings.

3.3.1 Installation of Packaged Anodes Install packaged anodes completely dry, lower them into holes by rope sling or by grasping the cloth gather. The anode lead wire shall not be used in lowering the anodes. Backfill the hole with fine soil in 6 inch layers and each layer shall be hand-tamped around the anode. The tamper shall not strike the anode or lead wire. If immediate testing is to be performed, add water only after backfilling and tamping has been completed to a point 6 inch above the anode. Approximately 2 gallons of water shall be poured into the hole; after the water is absorbed by the soil, backfilling and tamping shall be completed to the top of the hole. Anodes shall be installed as shown. When rock is found prior to achieving specified depth, anode may be installed horizontally to a depth at least as deep as the bottom of the pipe, with the approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.3.2 Underground Metal Pipe Line Install anodes 2 feet below the line to be protected unless otherwise noted on the drawings. To facilitate periodic electrical measurements during the life of the sacrificial anode system and to reduce the output current of the anodes if required, anode lead wires in a single group of anodes shall be buried a minimum of 2 feet and each anode lead wire shall be connected to an individual terminal in a test station. The anode lead cable shall make contact with the structure only through a test station. Resistance wire shall be installed between the anode lead cable and the pipe cable in the test station to reduce the current output, if required.

3.3.3 Lead and Resistance Wire Splices Lead wire splicing, when necessary, shall be made with copper split bolt connectors of proper size. The joint shall be carefully wrapped with at least 3 layers of electrical tape. Resistance wire connections shall be done with silver solder and the solder joints wrapped with a minimum of 3 layers of pressure-sensitive tape.

3.3.4 Magnesium Anodes for Metallic Components


Each metallic component shall be protected with magnesium anodes, size as stated in the Delivery or Task Order and located on each side of the metallic component and routed through a test station. Fire hydrant pipe component shall have a minimum number of magnesium anodes as indicated and routed through a test station for each hydrant. Pipe under concrete slabs shall have a minimum number of anodes as stated in the Delivery or Task Order for each location where metal pipe enters the building under the slab. A permanent reference cell shall be provided adjacent to the pipe entrance to the slab. Conductors shall be routed to a test station. Each valve shall have a minimum number of magnesium anodes as stated in the Delivery or Task Order and routed through a test station. Sections of metallic pipe 20 foot long, when used where force mains are within 10 feet of the water pipe, shall have a minimum of 4 17 lb anodes.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION 3.4.1 Rectifier Installation Mounting shall be as shown. Pole or wall mounting shall be equipped with a channel bracket, lifting eyes, and a keyhole at the top. Cross-arm brackets shall accommodate a 4 by 4 inch cross-arm.

3.4.2 Wire Connections 3.4.2.1 Wire Splicing Connecting wire splicing shall be made with copper compression connectors or exothermic welds, following instructions of the manufacturer. Split-bolt type connectors shall not be used.

3.4.2.2 Steel Surfaces Connections to ferrous pipe or metal tanks shall be made by exothermic weld methods as manufactured by an approved manufacturer for the type of pipe or tank. Electric arc welded connections and other types of welded connections to ferrous pipe and structures shall be approved before use.

3.4.3 Pipe Joints 3.4.3.1 Electrical Continuity Underground pipe shall be electrically continuous except at places where electrically isolating joints are specified. Pipe joined by means other than welding shall meet the following electrical continuity requirements:

a. Mechanical joints that are not factory designed to provide electrical continuity shall be bonded by installing a metallic bond across the joint. The bonding connections shall be made by the exothermic welding process.

b. Mechanical joints designed to provide electrical continuity may be used.

3.4.3.2 Electrical Isolation of Structures Perform electrical isolation of structures as follows:


a. Isolating Fittings: Isolating flanges and couplings shall be installed aboveground, or within manholes, wherever possible, but an isolating device that electrically separates a pipeline shall not be installed in a confined area where a combustible atmosphere may collect unless precautions are taken to prevent arcing such as by means of externally located surge arresters, grounding cells, or other means. Isolating flanges and couplings in lines entering buildings shall be located at least 12 inch above grade or floor level. Pipelines entering buildings either below or above ground shall be electrically isolated from the structure wall with an electrically isolating gas tight wall sleeve.

b. Gas Distribution Piping: Electrical isolation shall be provided at each building riser pipe to the pressure regulator, at all points where a short circuit to another structure or to a foreign structure may occur, and at other locations as indicated.

c. Steam, High Temperature, Chilled, and Water Line Supply and Return Piping and Line Conduit: Electrical isolation shall be provided at each building entrance, and at other locations as indicated.

d. Fuel, Gasoline, Storage Tanks and Fire Suppression: Electrical isolation shall be provided in each pipe at the building or at the tank as shown.

e. Copper Piping: Copper piping shall be electrically isolated at both ends of the pipe run or wrapped with pipeline tape and electrically isolated at both ends as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

f. Underground Storage Tanks (UST): Tanks shall be electrically isolated from other metallic structures. Components protected with the tank such as pipes, vents, anchors, and fill pipes shall be bonded to the tank.

3.4.4 Dissimilar Metals Buried piping of dissimilar metals including new and old steel piping, excepting valves, shall be electrically separated by means of electrically insulating joints at every place of connection. The insulating joint, including the pipes, shall be coated with an underground type dielectric coating for a minimum distance of 10 diameters on each side of the joint.

3.4.5 Ferrous Valves Dissimilar ferrous valves in a buried ferrous pipeline, including the pipe, shall be coated with an underground type dielectric coating for a minimum distance of 10 diameters on each side of the valve.

3.4.6 Brass or Bronze Valves Brass or bronze valves shall not be used in a buried ferrous pipeline.

3.4.7 Metal Pipe Junction If the dissimilar metal pipe junction, including valves, is not buried and is exposed to atmosphere only, the connection or valve, including the pipe,


shall be coated with an underground type dielectric coating for a minimum distance of 3 diameters on each side of the junction.

3.4.8 Casing Where a pipeline is installed in a casing under a roadway or railway, the pipeline shall be electrically isolated from the casing, and the annular space sealed against incursion of water.

3.4.9 Test Stations Test stations shall be of the type, location and mounting shown. Buried electrically isolating joints shall be provided with test wire connections brought to a test station. Changes in designated location shall have prior approval. Unless otherwise shown, other test stations shall be located as follows:

a. At 1,000 foot intervals or less.

b. Where the pipe or conduit crosses any other metal pipe.

c. At both ends of casings under roadways and railways.

d. Where both ends of an insulating joint are not accessible above ground for testing purposes.

3.5 TRAINING COURSE Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total of 16 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions. At least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the training course, submit the training course curriculum for approval, along with the proposed training date. Training shall consist of demonstration of test equipment, providing forms for test data and the tolerances which indicate that the system works satisfactorily.

3.6 TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS 3.6.1 Baseline Potentials Each test and measurement will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 5 working days prior to each test. After backfill of the pipe or tank and anodes is completed, but before the anodes are connected to the pipe or tank, the static potential-to-soil of the pipe or tank shall be measured. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations specified for pipe- and tank-to-reference electrode potential measurements.

3.6.2 Isolation Testing Before the anode system is connected to the pipe or tank, an isolation test shall be made at each isolating joint or fitting. This test shall


demonstrate that no metallic contact, or short circuit exists between the two isolated sections of the pipe or tank. Any isolating fittings installed and found to be defective shall be reported to the Contracting Officer.

3.6.2.1 Insulation Checker Use a Model 601 insulation checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics" or an approved equal, for isolating joint (flange) electrical testing in accordance with manufacturer's operating instructions. An isolating joint that is good will read full scale on the meter; if an isolating joint is shorted, the meter pointer will be deflected at near zero on the meter scale. Location of the fault shall be determined from the instructions and the joint shall be repaired. If an isolating joint is located inside a vault, the pipe shall be sleeved with insulator when entering and leaving the vault.

3.6.2.2 Cathodic Protection Meter Use a Model B3A2 cathodic protection meter, as manufactured by "M. C. Miller" or an approved equal using the continuity check circuit for isolating joint (flange) electrical testing. Perform this test in addition to the Model 601 insulation checker. Continuity is checked across the isolated joint after the test lead wire is shorted together and the meter adjusted to scale. A full scale deflection indicates the system is shorted at some location. The Model 601 verifies that the particular insulation under test is good and the Model B3A2 verifies that the system is isolated. If the system is shorted, further testing shall be performed to isolate the location of the short.

3.6.3 Anode Output After the rectifier is energized, the current output of the individual anode leads shall be measured by using an approved method. This may be done with a shunt and MV meter, a low-resistance ammeter, or a clamp-on milliammeter. The total current shall be measured and compared to the sum of all anode currents and to the rectifier output current. If an individual anode output current meets or exceeds the recommended output for that anode, the system shall be turned down or balancing resistors installed. Calculation of the wattage of the resistors shall be sufficient to handle the maximum load which will be encountered on the anode lead. All measurements obtained, the date, time, and locations of all measurements shall be recorded.

3.6.4 Electrode Potential Measurements Upon completion of the installation and with the entire cathodic protection system in operation, electrode potential measurements shall be made using a copper-copper sulphate reference electrode and a potentiometer-voltmeter, or a direct current voltmeter having an internal resistance (sensitivity) of not less than 10 megohms per volt and a full scale of 10 volts. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations used for baseline potentials. The values obtained and the date, time, and locations of measurements shall be recorded. No less than 8 measurements shall be made over any length of line or component. Additional measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser, with the reference electrode placed directly over the service line.


3.6.5 Location of Measurements 3.6.5.1 Coated Piping or Conduit For coated piping or conduit, take measurements from the reference electrode located in contact with the earth, directly over the pipe. Connection to the pipe shall be made at service risers, valves, test leads, or by other means suitable for test purposes. Pipe to soil potential measurements shall be made at intervals not exceeding 5 feet. The Contractor may use a continuous pipe to soil potential profile in lieu of 5 ft interval pipe to soil potential measurements. Additional measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser, with the reference electrode placed directly over the service line adjacent to the riser. Potentials shall be plotted versus distance to an approved scale. Locations where potentials do not meet or exceed the criteria shall be identified and reported to the Contracting Officer.

3.6.5.2 Underground Tanks For underground tanks, make a minimum of three measurements taken from the reference electrode located:

a. Directly over the center of the tank.

b. At a point directly over the tank and midway between each pair of anodes.

c. At each end of the tank.

3.6.6 Casing Tests Before final acceptance of the installation, the electrical separation of carrier pipe from casings shall be tested and any short circuits corrected.

3.6.7 Interference Testing Before final acceptance of the installation, interference tests shall be made with respect to any foreign pipes and tanks in cooperation with the owner of the foreign pipes and tanks. A full report of the tests giving all details shall be made.

3.6.8 Holiday Test Repair any damage to the protective covering, during transit and handling, before installation. After field coating and wrapping has been applied, inspect the entire pipe by an electric holiday detector with impressed current in accordance with NACE SP0188 using a full ring, spring type coil electrode. The holiday detector shall be equipped with a bell, buzzer, or other type of audible signal which sounds when a holiday is detected. Holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired upon detection. Occasional checks of holiday detector potential will be made by the Contracting Officer to determine suitability of the detector. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for conducting the inspection. Inspect the coating system for holes, voids, cracks, and other damage during installation.


3.6.9 Recording Measurements Record all pipe- and tank- to-soil potential measurements including initial potentials where required. Locate, correct and report to Contracting Officer any short circuits to foreign pipes or tanks encountered during checkout of the installed cathodic protection system. Pipe- and Tank-to-soil potential measurements are required on as many pipes or tanks as necessary to determine the extent of protection or to locate short-circuits.




JBLM DESIGN STANDARDS SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING Design Requirements

a. Emergency power exit and means of egress lighting shall be provided from a single source such as lighting inverters (preferred) or generator that meets the requirements of NFPA 101. Battery systems shall incorporate maintenance-free lead-acid or lead-calcium batteries.

b. Battery operated emergency lighting equipment shall be computer-base and self-testing/self-diagnostic that automatically perform a minimum 30 second diagnostic test/routine at least every 30 days, and an annual test for a minimum of 1-1/2 hours continuous. Emergency lighting equipment shall be fully operational for the duration of the tests. Status, test history, failures and alarm information shall be stored in memory and retrievable from unit display at all times. Provide provisions for remote alarm indications and condition monitoring. Emergency power sources shall be located in dedicated electrical equipment rooms readily accessible to maintenance personnel independent of building occupants. (i.e., space accessible from exterior of facility).

c. Lighted exit signs shall be of a type that consume nor more than 3 watts per side (LED). Do not install self-luminous type exit signs.

d. Install light fixtures in troop areas (i.e., barracks, admin, supply facilities) where they are accessible for maintenance with 8-foot to 12-foot spacing and no higher above floor than is accessible with a 6-foot stepladder. Re-lamping is a self-help responsibility for light fixtures under 12 feet.

SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The Environmental Policy Act of 2005 and FAR section 23.203 require federal agencies to purchase energy consuming products that are either Energy Star or Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) qualified unless no qualification exists for the product category. This requirement includes products such as lighting that fall under this specification. More information can be found at http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?fuseaction=find_a_product. and http://www1.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_roof_products.html. Questions may be directed to the JBLM Green Procurement Program Coordinator (Phone: 253-966-6466, Fax: 253-967-9937).


http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?fuseaction=find_a_product.

http://www1.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_roof_products.html


ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2008a) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened

ASTM A 580/A 580M (2006) Standard Specification for Stainless

Steel Wire ASTM A 641/A 641M (2003) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire ASTM A 653/A 653M (2008) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B 633 (2007) Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

ASTM E 2129 (2005) Standard Practice for Data Collection

for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products

CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

CEC Title 24 (1978; R 2005) California's Energy Efficiency

Standards for Residential and Nonresidential Buildings

GREEN SEAL (GS)

GC-12 (1997) Occupancy Sensors

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)

IESNA HB-9 (2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005) IES Lighting

Handbook


Electrical Safety Code IEEE C62.41.1 (2002) IEEE Guide on the Surges Environment




IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE

Standards Terms




(1000 Volts Maximum) NEMA ANSLG C78.41 (2006) Guidelines for Low-Pressure Sodium

Lamps NEMA ANSLG C78.42 (2007) Standard for High-Pressure Sodium

Lamps NEMA C78.1381 (1998) Electric Lamps - 250-Watt, 70 Watt,

M85 Metal-Halide Lamps NEMA C78.43 (2007) Standard for Electric Lamps - Single-

Ended Metal-Halide Lamps NEMA C78.81 (2005) Electric Lamps - Double-capped

Fluorescent Lamps Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

NEMA C78.901 (2005) Electric Lamps - Single Base

Fluorescent Lamps Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

NEMA C82.11 (2002) High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp

Ballasts NEMA C82.4 (2002) Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge

and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)




Controls and Systems Enclosures NEMA LL 1 (1997; R 2002) Procedures for Linear

Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and the TCLP Extraction


NFPA 101 (2008) Life Safety Code, 2006 Edition

NFPA 70 (2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code -

2008 Edition NFPA 90A (2008) Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems



UL 1029 (1994; Rev thru Dec 2007) Standard for Safety High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

UL 1598 (2008) Luminaires

UL 595 (1985; Rev thru Sep 1991) Marine-Type

Electric Lighting Fixtures UL 773 (1995; Rev thru Mar 2002) Standard for Plug-

In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

UL 773A (2006) Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches

for Lighting Control UL 844 (2006; Rev thru Sep 2008) Standard for

Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 924 (2006) Standard for Emergency Lighting and

Power Equipment UL 935 (2001; Rev thru Dec 2007) Standard for

Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50

percent will have survived under normal conditions.

c. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4.1 Lighting Control System Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors.

1.5 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G"


designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications, and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB-9, as applicable, for the lighting system specified.

SD-03 Product Data Submit manufacturer documentation demonstrating that the included model meets current Energy Star or FEMP efficiency requirements. Alternately, submit written justification for non-use per Paragraph 1.6.3.3

Fluorescent lighting fixtures; G

Fluorescent electronic ballasts; G

Fluorescent lamps; G

High-intensity-discharge (HID) lighting fixtures; G

HID ballasts; G

High-pressure sodium (HPS) lamps; G

Low-pressure sodium lamps; G

Metal-halide lamps; G

Incandescent lighting fixtures; G

Lighting contactor; G

Time switch; G

Photocell switch; G

Power hook fixture hangers; G

Exit signs; G

Central emergency system; G

Occupancy sensors; G

Electronic dimming ballast; G

Dimming ballast controls; G

Light Level Sensor ; G

Local/Regional Materials

Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of


local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Environmental Data

Energy Efficiency

Documentation demonstrating that the included fluorescent lighting fixtures, fluorescent tube lamps, compact fluorescent lamps, fluorescent ballasts, fluorescent luminaires, downlight luminaires, and HID lighting fixtures meet current Energy Star or FEMP efficiency requirements unless a noncompliant model has been specified by the designer or requirements generator. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of each light source.

SD-06 Test Reports

Operating test

Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."


Lighting Control System, Data Package 5; G

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein, showing all light fixtures, control modules, control zones, occupancy sensors, light level sensors, power packs, dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control wire, conduit, and associated hardware.

Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option, submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of vendors with vendor part numbers.

1.6.2 Regulatory Requirements


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.6.3 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.



1.6.3.3 Energy Efficiency Per the Energy Policy Act of 2005, lighting shall be Energy Star or Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) qualified unless the Architect/Engineer or requirements generator submits a written finding of an exception as defined in the Energy Policy Act of 2005, Section 104, using the JOINT BASE LEWIS-MCCHORD GREEN PROCUREMENT EXCEPTION FORM. Such justifications must be based on the inability to acquire a product that meets the functional requirements of the project or is cost-effective over the life of the product, taking energy cost savings into account. Justifications shall specify which of the exceptions is claimed (functional requirement or life cycle cost) and provide the basis and evidence for this determination. Life cycle cost determination shall rely on the life cycle cost analysis method in 10 CFR 436, Subpart A or another method determined to be equivalent by the Department of Defense. The Exception Form is available from the contracting official or the JBLM Green Procurement Program Coordinator (Building 1210, (253) 966-6466, [email protected]). The completed form shall be submitted via email (with copies of supporting documents included) to the Contracting Officer’s Representative. The following address shall be inserted in the carbon copy (“cc”) line of the email: [email protected]. Attached file sizes shall be

mailto:[email protected]



kept to a minimum to avoid transmission errors associated with JBLM security. If use of email is not possible, the submitting party shall coordinate with the Contracting Officer’s Representative and ask that they forward copies of these documents to the JBLM Green Procurement Coordinator (Bldg 1210, 966-6466). More information can be found at http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?fuseaction=find_a_product. and http://www1.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_purchasingspecs.html.


1.7.1 Electronic Ballast Warranty Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.

1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement. Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement options, and submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not landfill or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.

1.9 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1.9.1 Local/Regional Materials Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. Per Army Regulation 420-1, Section 22-12(d)(1), the lighting fixture standard for new construction, remodeling, and modular office furniture is the T-8 lamp with instant start electronic ballast or the T-5 lamp. Day-lighting and occupancy controls shall be used when determined to be cost-effective.

1.9.2 Environmental Data Submit Table 1 of ASTM E 2129 for the following products: Fluorescent and HID lamps shall have been submitted to and accepted by the State of Washington Department of Ecology as not being designated as hazardous waste.

http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?fuseaction=find_a_product.

http://www1.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_purchasingspecs.html


Copies of Department of Ecology letters of concurrence shall be submitted for each type and manufacturer of lamps used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES UL 1598. Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts unless specifically indicated otherwise. Specifications are supported and supplemented by information and details shown on the drawings. Illustrations are indicative of the general type desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent energy efficiency, light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved. Fluorescent fixture lens frames on recessed and surface mounted troffers shall be one assembly with mitered corners. Parabolic louvers shall have a low iridescent finish and 45 degree cut-off. Louver intersection joints shall be hairline type and shall conceal mounting tabs or other assembly methods. Louvers shall be free from blemishes, lines or defects which distort the visual surface. Integral ballast and wireway compartments shall be easily accessible without the use of special tools. Housings shall be constructed to include grounding necessary to start the lamps. Open fixtures shall be equipped with a sleeve, wire guard, or other positive means to prevent lamps from falling. Medium bi-pin lampholders shall be twist-in type with positive locking position. Long compact fluorescent fixtures and fixtures utilizing U-bend lamps shall have clamps or secondary lampholders to support the free ends of the lamps. Per Army Regulation 420-1, Section 22-12(d)(1), the lighting fixture standard for new construction, remodeling, and modular office furniture is the T 8 lamp with instant start electronic ballast or the T 5 lamp. Products shall comply with this fixture standard. Day-lighting and occupancy controls will be used when determined to be cost-effective. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) standards of lighting will be used as a guide for all Army installations and facilities including those occupied by reimbursable tenants. Lighting fixtures shall comply with the efficiency requirements stated in Paragraph 1.6.3.3

2.1.1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:

a. Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA C82.11, NFPA 70, and CEC Title

24 unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100% electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).

c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum).

Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.


d. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen

output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation. Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible lamp.

e. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum).

Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).

f. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."

g. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.

h. Ballasts shall be programmed start unless otherwise indicated.

Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.

i. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.

j. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection

circuits as required by NEMA C78.81 and NEMA C78.901 as applicable.

k. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.

l. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years

from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic Ballast Warranty" herein.

2.1.1.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum).

b. Input wattage.

1. 32 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp

2. 62 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps

3. 92 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps

4. 114 watts (maximum) when operating four F32T8 lamps

c. Ballast efficacy factor.

1. 2.54 (minimum) when operating one F32T8 lamp

2. 1.44 (minimum) when operating two F32T8 lamps

3. 0.93 (minimum) when operating three F32T8 lamps

4. 0.73 (minimum) when operating four F32T8 lamps

d. Provide three and four lamp fixtures with two ballasts per fixture where multilevel switching is indicated.


e. A single ballast may be used to serve multiple fixtures if they are

continuously mounted and factory manufactured for that installation with an integral wireway.

2.1.1.2 F17T8 Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 25 percent (maximum).

b. Input wattage:

1. 34 watts (maximum) when operating two F17T8 lamps. 2.1.1.3 T-5 Long Twin Tube Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall not be greater than 25 percent when operating one lamp, 15 percent when operating two lamps, and 20 percent when operating three lamps.

b. Input wattage:

1. 45 watts (maximum) when operating one F40 T-5 lamps

2. 74 watts (maximum) when operating two F40 T-5 lamps

3. 105 watts (maximum) when operating three F40 T-5 lamps

c. Provide three and four lamp fixtures with two ballasts per fixture

where multilevel switching is indicated.

d. A single ballast may be used to serve multiple fixtures if they are continuously mounted and factory manufactured for that installation with an integral wireway.

2.1.1.4 F96T8 Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall not be greater than 30 percent when operating one lamp and 20 percent when operating two lamps.

b. Input wattage:

1. 56 watts (maximum) when operating one F96T8 lamps

2. 102 watts (maximum) when operating two F96T8 lamps

c. A single ballast may be used to serve multiple fixtures if they are

continuously mounted and factory manufactured for that installation with an integral wireway.

2.1.2 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Dimming Ballast The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:

a. Ballast shall comply with NEMA C82.11, UL 935, and NFPA 70, unless

specified otherwise. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast dimming


capability range shall be from 100 to 5 percent (minimum range) of light output, flicker free. Ballast shall start lamp at any preset light output setting without first having to go to full light output. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum) at full light output, and 0.90

(minimum) over the entire dimming range.

c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum). Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.

d. Ballast factor at full light output shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and

1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).

e. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A".

f. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.

g. Ballast shall be programmed start. Ballast may operate lamps in a

series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.

h. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.

i. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a

minimum of 40 degrees F for normal service and 0 degrees F where cold temperature service is required unless otherwise indicated.

j. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum) over

the entire dimming range.

k. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection circuits as required by NEMA C78.81 and NEMA C78.901 as applicable.

2.1.2.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast Input wattage, for indicated lamp quantity shall be:

a. 35 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp.

b. 70 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps.

c. 104 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps.

2.1.3 Dimming Ballast Controls The dimming ballast controls shall be a slide dimmer with on/off control. The slide dimmer shall be compatible with the ballast and control the ballast light output over the full dimming range. Dimming ballast controls shall be approved by the ballast manufacturer.


2.1.4 Light Level Sensor UL listed. Light level sensor shall be capable of detecting changes in ambient lighting levels, shall provide a dimming range of 20 percent to 100 percent, minimum, and shall be designed for use with dimming ballast and voltage system to which they are connected. Sensor shall be capable of controlling 40 electronic dimming ballast, minimum. Sensor light level shall be adjustable and have a set level range from 10 to 100 footcandles, minimum. Sensor shall have a bypass function to electrically override sensor control.

2.1.5 Fluorescent Lamps

a. T-8 rapid start low mercury lamps shall be rated 32 watts (maximum), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1.

b. T-8 rapid start lamp, 17 watt (maximum), nominal length of 24 inches,

1300 initial lumens, CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours.

c. T-8 instant start lamp, 59 watts (maximum), nominal length of 96 inches,

minimum CRI of 75, 5700 initial lumens, color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 15,000 hours.

e. T-5, long twin tube fluorescent lamp, 40 watts (maximum), 3500 K, 22.6

inches maximum length, 20,000 hours average rated life, 3150 initial lumens, CRI of 80 (minimum), 2G11 Type base, 90 to 100 lumens/watt depending on wattage.

f. T-8, U shaped fluorescent lamp, 31 watts maximum, 2600 initial lumens

(minimum), 3500 K, 75 CRI (minimum), 20,000 hours average rated life, 1.625 inch leg spacing.

g. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be: CRI 80, minimum, 3500 K, 10,000

hours average rated life, and as follows:

1. T-4, twin tube, rated 5 watt, 250 initial lumens (minimum) 7 watts, 400 initial lumens (minimum), 9 watts, 600 initial lumens (minimum), and 13 watts, 825 initial lumens (minimum), as indicated.

2. T-4, double twin tube, rated 13 watts, 900 initial lumens

(minimum), 18 watts, 1200 initial lumens (minimum), and 26 watts, 1800 initial lumens (minimum), as indicated.

Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start.

2.1.6 Compact Fluorescent Fixtures Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Providing assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures is prohibited except


when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures. Fixtures shall use lamps as indicated, with a minimum CRI of 80.

2.1.6.1 Bare Bulb Retrofits Replace 40-watt incandescent bulbs (495+ lumens) with 11- to 14-watt compact fluorescent bulbs (45+ lumens per watt). Replace 60-watt incandescent bulbs (900+ lumens) with 15- to 19-watt compact fluorescent bulbs (60+ lumens per watt). Replace 75-watt incandescent bulbs (1200+ lumens) with 20- to 25-watt compact fluorescent bulbs (60+ lumens per watt). Replace 100-watt incandescent bulbs (1750+ lumens) with 29-watt or greater compact fluorescent bulbs (60+ lumens per watt).

2.1.6.2 Reflector Type Bulb Retrofits Replace 50-watt incandescent bulbs (550+ lumens) with 17- to 19-watt compact fluorescent bulbs (33+ lumens per watt). Replace 60-watt incandescent bulbs (675+ lumens) with 20- to 21-watt compact fluorescent bulbs (40+ lumens per watt). Replace 75-watt incandescent bulbs (875+ lumens) with 22-watt or greater compact fluorescent bulbs (40+ lumens per watt).

2.1.7 Open-Tube Fluorescent Fixtures Provide with self-locking sockets, or lamp retainers (two per lamp). Provide lamps with shatter resistant coating, non-yellowing, nominal thickness of 15 mils, and with 97 percent (minimum) light transmission, or provide a clear polycarbonate protective sleeve with end caps, over lamp, with 95 percent (minimum) light transmission. The sleeve shall be rated to withstand the thermal profile of the lamp and ballast.

2.1.8 Air Handling Fixtures Fixtures used as air handling registers shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A.

2.1.9 Electromagnetic Interference Filters Provide in each fluorescent fixture mounted in shielded enclosures where indicated. Filters shall be integral to the fixture assembly with one filter per ballast and shall suppress electromagnetic interference in the AM radio band from 500 to 1700 kHz.

2.2 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE (HID) LIGHTING FIXTURES UL 1598. The following specifications are supported and supplemented by information and details on the drawings. Additional fixtures, if shown, shall conform to this specification. Reflectors shall be anodized aluminum. Fixtures for horizontal lamps shall have position oriented lampholders. Lampholders shall be pulse-rated to 5,000 volts. Fixtures indicated as classified or rated for hazardous locations or special service shall be designed and independently tested for the environment in which they are installed. Recessed lens fixtures shall have extruded aluminum lens frames. Ballasts shall be integral to fixtures and shall be accessible without the use of special tools. Remote ballasts shall be encased and potted. Lamps shall be shielded from direct view with a UV absorbing material such as tempered glass, and shall be circuited through a cut-off switch which will shut off the lamp circuit if the lens is not in place.


2.2.1 HID Ballasts UL 1029 and NEMA C82.4 and shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high power factor type (minimum 90%). Provide single-lamp ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 20 degrees F. Ballasts shall be:

a. Designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Designed for installation in a normal ambient temperature of 40 degrees

C.

c. Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life.

High-pressure sodium (HPS) ballasts shall have a solid-state igniter/starter with an average life in the pulsing mode of 3500 hours at the intended ambient temperature. Igniter case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C in any mode.

2.2.2 High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Lamps NEMA ANSLG C78.42 wattage as indicated. 150 watt lamps, if required, shall be 55 volt type.

2.2.2.1 Luminaire Efficiency Rating (LER)

a. Upward efficiency of 0%

1. 150-399 watts: minimum 58 LER for closed fixture; minimum 68 for open fixture

2. 400-999 watts: minimum 63 LER for closed fixture; minimum 84 for

open fixture

b. Upward efficiency of 1%-10%



open fixture

3. 1000+ watts: minimum 109 LER for open fixture

c. Upward efficiency of 11% to 20%

1. 150-399 watts: minimum 78 LER for open fixture

2. 400-999 watts: minimum 94 for open fixture

d. Upward efficiency greater than 20%



2.2.3 Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps NEMA ANSLG C78.41.

2.2.4 Metal-Halide Lamps

a. Double-ended, 70 watt, conforming to NEMA C78.1381

b. Single-ended, wattage as indicated, conforming to NEMA C78.43 2.2.4.1 Luminaire Efficiency Rating (LER)


1. 150-399 watts: minimum 41 LER for closed fixture


3. 1000+ watts: minimum 77 LER for closed fixture




open fixture


c. Upward efficiency greater than 20%



2.3 INCANDESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES Use of incandescent lamps and fixtures is prohibited, unless specifically indicated otherwise. UL 1598.

2.4 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast shall be from the bottom. Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures shall be as indicated.

2.5 SUSPENDED FIXTURES Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall be shock-absorbing type where indicated. Hangers shall allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to limit swinging. Single-unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have twin-stem hangers. Multiple-


unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Rods shall be a minimum 0.18 inch diameter.

2.6 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS In addition to requirements stated herein, provide fixtures for hazardous locations which conform to UL 844 or which have Factory Mutual certification for the class and division indicated. Fixture shall also conform to UL 595 for marine environments as indicated.

2.7 SWITCHES 2.7.1 Toggle Switches Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.8 LIGHTING CONTACTOR NEMA ICS 2, electrically operated, mechanically held contactor with ratings as indicated. Provide in NEMA enclosure suitable for the environment and conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have silver alloy double-break contacts and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactor. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.

2.9 TIME SWITCH Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time switch shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, with NEMA enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.

2.10 PHOTOCELL SWITCH UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell with contacts rated and mounted as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources.

2.11 POWER HOOK FIXTURE HANGERS Provide UL listed assembly including through-wired power hook housing, interlocking plug and receptacle, power cord, and fixture support loop. Power hook housing shall be cast aluminum having two 3/4 inch threaded hubs. Support hook shall have safety screw. Fixture support loop shall be cast aluminum with provisions for accepting 3/4 inch threaded fixture stems. Power cord shall include 16 inches of 3 conductor No. 16 Type SO cord. Assembly shall be rated 15 amperes at 120 volts or 277 volts, and 20 amperes at 480 volts.


2.12 EXIT SIGNS UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Exit signs shall be remote-powered type. Exit signs shall be ENERGY STAR compliant and shall use no more than 3 watts per face. Luminance contrast shall be greater than 0.8. Average luminance shall be greater than 15 cd/m2 measured at normal (0 degree) and 45 degree viewing angles. Minimum luminance shall be greater than 8.6 cd/m2 measured at normal and 45 degree viewing angles. Maximum to minimum luminance shall be less than 20:1 measured at normal and 45 degree viewing angles. Self-luminous type exit signs are not authorized. The manufacturer warranty for defective parts shall be at least 5 years.

2.13 CENTRAL EMERGENCY SYSTEM System shall supply emergency power at 60 Hz sine wave ac for a minimum period of 90 minutes. Sine wave ac system shall have an inverter output distortion of not more than 10 percent at unity power factor. The system shall be designed to handle surges during loss and recovery of power.

2.13.1 Operation With normal power applied, batteries shall be automatically charged. Upon loss of normal power, system shall automatically disengage from the normal input line and switch to a self-contained inverter within 1 second when serving fluorescent lamps and 2 milliseconds when serving HID lamps. Inverter shall have built-in protection when output is shorted or overloaded. When normal power resumes, the emergency system shall automatically switch back to normal operation before the power loss. Size transfer switch for this function to handle 125 percent of full load.

2.13.2 Battery Charger Provide two-rate charger for lead-calcium batteries. The charger shall be solid-state, completely automatic, maintaining the batteries in a fully charged condition, and recharging the batteries to full capacity as specified in UL 924.

2.13.3 Batteries Batteries shall be sealed lead-calcium type, shall operate unattended, and shall require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than 10 years.

2.13.4 Accessories Provide visual indicators to indicate normal power, inverter power, and battery charger operation. Provide test switch to simulate power failure by interrupting the input line, battery voltage meter, load ammeter, automatic brown-out circuitry to switch to emergency power when input line voltage drops below 75 percent of normal value, electrolyte level detector that will activate a visual or audio alarm in the event of a low water condition, time delay feature for areas with HID lighting, and low voltage cutoff (LVD) to disconnect inverter when battery voltage drops to approximately 80 percent of nominal voltage. Provide self-test/self-diagnostic feature that automatically performs a minimum 30-second test and diagnostic routine at least every 30-days and indicates failures and alarms. Status, test and alarm information shall be stored in memory and retrievable from the unit


display. Include provisions for remote alarm indications and condition monitoring from the Base EMCS.

2.13.5 Enclosure Provide a free-standing cabinet with floor stand. Cabinet construction shall be of 14 gauge sheet steel with baked-on enamel finish and locking type latch.

2.14 OCCUPANCY SENSORS UL listed. Comply with GC-12. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power packs shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy sensor mounting as indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes. Wall mounted sensors shall match the color of adjacent wall plates as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, ceiling mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.

a. Ultrasonic sensor shall be crystal controlled and shall not cause

detection interference between adjacent sensors.

b. Infrared sensors shall have a daylight filter. Sensor shall have a fresnel lens that is applicable to space to be controlled.

c. Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor

d. Microwave and audiophonic sensors.

Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic and infrared sensor detection. Lights shall remain on if either the ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement. Infrared sensor shall have lens selected for indicated usage and daylight filter to prevent short wavelength infrared interference. Ultrasonic sensor frequency shall be crystal controlled.

2.15 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS 2.15.1 Wires ASTM A 641/A 641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gauge).

2.15.2 Wires, for Humid Spaces ASTM A 580/A 580M, composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gauge).

2.15.3 Straps Galvanized steel, one by 3/16 inch, conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, with a light commercial zinc coating or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M with an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to ASTM B 633, Type RS.


2.15.4 Rods Threaded steel rods, 3/16 inch diameter, zinc or cadmium coated.

2.16 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.16.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.16.2 Labels Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":

a. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin,

quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

b. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or

coated) for HID luminaires.

c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.

e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for

all luminaires. All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.

2.17 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, NFPA 101 and to the requirements specified herein. Carefully coordinate lighting fixture locations with mechanical and structural features prior to installation and position fixtures according to architectural reflected ceiling plans; otherwise, lighting fixtures shall be symmetrically located according to the room arrangement when uniform illumination is required, or asymmetrically located to suit conditions fixed by design and shown. Raceways, junction


boxes, and lighting fixtures shall not be supported from sheet metal roof decks. If any conflicts occur necessitating departures from the drawings, details of and reasons for departures shall be submitted and approved prior to implementing any change.

3.1.1 Lamps Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15 percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps of each type from the original manufacturer.

3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires, straps or rods per fixture spaced approximately equidistant around the fixture. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3/4 inchmetal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture. Provide wires, straps or rods for lighting fixture support in this section. Lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings shall also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.

3.1.3 Suspended Fixtures Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation. Suspended fixtures in continuous rows shall have internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and shall be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces. Aligning splines shall be used on extruded aluminum fixtures to assure hairline joints. Steel fixtures shall be supported to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss specified. Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable shall be stainless


steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.

3.1.4 Ballasts 3.1.4.1 Remote Ballasts Remote type ballasts or transformers, where indicated, shall be mounted in a well ventilated, easily accessible location, within the maximum operating distance from the lamp, as designated by the manufacturer.

3.1.4.2 Electronic Dimming Ballasts All electronic dimming ballasts controlled by the same controller shall be of the same manufacturer. All fluorescent lamps on electronic dimming ballast control shall be seasoned or burned in at full light output for 100 hours before dimming.

3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Wire exit signs and emergency lighting from the central emergency system as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.7 Occupancy Sensor Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration to 10 minutes.

3.1.8 Light Level Sensor Locate light level sensor as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for 50 footcandles or for the indicated light level at the typical work plane for that area.

3.2 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.


3.3.1 Electronic Dimming Ballast Test for full range of dimming capability. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range.

3.3.2 Occupancy Sensor Test sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being covered.




JBLM DESIGN STANDARDS SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING Design Requirements

a. Provide control for exterior lighting in troop areas (i.e., barracks, admin, supply facilities) through use of single photo-cell (fail in on position) and lighting contactor or controller. Photocell shall be located in an area easily accessible with no more than 8’ step ladder.

b. Where new or replacement electrical lighting fixtures are required in the JBLM Historic District, AE’s shall refer to Maintenance and Repair Manual for Historic structures at JBLM, WA.

c. Specify the use of fluorescent and HID lamps that have been submitted to and accepted by the Washington Department of Ecology as not being designated as a dangerous waste within Washington State. Require copies of DOE letters of concurrence be included in submittals for each type and manufacturer of lamp.

SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS)

ATIS O5.1 (2002; Supple A 2003; Supple B 2003; Supple C

2004) Specifications and Dimensions (for Wood Poles)

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO LTS (2001; Am 2002, Am 2003, Am 2006) Standard

Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals


ANSI C136.20 (1990) Roadway Lighting Equipment Fiber

Reinforced-Plastic (FRP) Lighting Poles ANSI C136.21 (2004) Roadway Lighting Equipment - Vertical

Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted Luminairesk

AMERICAN WOOD PRESERVERS ASSOCIATION (AWPA)


AWPA C1 (2003) All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C4 (2003) Poles - Preservative Treatment by

Pressure Processes AWPA M6 (1996) Brands Used on Forest Products


ASTM A 153/A 153M (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc

Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM B 108/B 108M (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum-

Alloy Permanent Mold Castings ASTM C 1089 (2006) Standard Specification for Spun Cast

Prestressed Concrete Poles ASTM E 2129 (2005) Standard Practice for Data Collection

for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products

ASTM G 154 (2006) Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus

for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA) IESNA HB-9 (2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005) IES Lighting

Handbook


Electrical Safety Code IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE

Standards Terms

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA 250 (2003) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum) NEMA ANSLG C78.42 (2007) Standard for High-Pressure Sodium

Lamps NEMA C136.10 (2006) American National Standard for Roadway

Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing

NEMA C136.13 (2004) Roadway Lighting Equipment, Metal

Brackets for Wood Poles NEMA C136.3 (2005) Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment

Luminaire Attachments


NEMA C78.1381 (1998) Electric Lamps - 250-Watt, 70 Watt,

M85 Metal-Halide Lamps NEMA C78.43 (2007) Standard for Electric Lamps - Single-

Ended Metal-Halide Lamps NEMA C82.4 (2002) Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge

and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)




Controls and Systems Enclosures


2008 Edition

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) RUS Bull 345-67 (1998) REA Specification for Filled Telephone

Cables, PE-39

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1029 (1994; Rev thru Dec 2007) Standard for Safety

High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts UL 1598 (2008) Luminaires

UL 773 (1995; Rev thru Mar 2002) Standard for Plug-

In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

UL 773A (2006) Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches

for Lighting Control 1.2 DEFINITIONS


b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50

percent will have survived under normal conditions.

c. Groundline section is that portion between one foot above and 2 feet below the groundline.


1.3 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire drawings; G

Poles; G

SD-03 Product Data

Local/Regional Materials

Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Environmental Data

Energy Efficiency

Documentation demonstrating that the included lamps and luminaires meet current Energy Star or FEMP efficiency requirements unless the product does not have a corresponding Energy Star or FEMP category or a noncompliant model has been specified by the designer or requirements generator. For Energy Star lighting, submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.

Luminaires; G

Lamps; G

Ballasts; G

Lighting contactor; G

Time switch; G

Photocell switch; G

Concrete poles; G

Aluminum poles; G

Steel poles; G

Fiberglass poles; G


Brackets

Auxiliary instant-on quartz system; G

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Pressure treated wood pole quality

Tests for fiberglass poles; G

Operating test

Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Concrete poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.

Fiberglass poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.


Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Drawing Requirements 1.4.1.1 Luminaire Drawings Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.

1.4.1.2 Poles Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information. For concrete poles, include: section and details to indicate quantities and position of prestressing steel, spiral steel, inserts, and through holes; initial prestressing steel tension; and concrete strengths at release and at 28 days.


1.4.2 Pressure Treated Wood Pole Quality Ensure the quality of pressure treated wood poles. Furnish an inspection report (for wood poles) of an independent inspection agency, approved by the Contracting Officer, stating that offered products comply with AWPA M6 and RUS Bull 345-67 standards. The RUS approved Quality Mark "WQC" on each pole will be accepted, in lieu of inspection reports, as evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA treatment standards.

1.4.3 Design Data for Luminaires

a. Distribution data according to IESNA classification type as defined in IESNA HB-9.

b. Computerized horizontal illumination levels in footcandles at ground

level, taken every 10 feet. Include average maintained footcandle level and maximum and minimum ratio.

c. Amount of shielding on luminaires.

1.4.4 Tests for Fiberglass Poles

a. Ultraviolet resistance tests: Perform according to ASTM G 154 using a UV-B lamp having a 313 nanometer wavelength, operated at 130 degrees F, cycling the lamp on for 4 hours and off for 4 hours for a total test period of 1500 hours minimum with the following results:

Fiber exposure: None Crazing: None Checking: None Chalking: None Color: May dull slightly

b. Flexural strength and deflection test: Test loading shall be as a

cantilever beam with pole butt as fixed end and a force simulating wind load at the free end.

1.4.5 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.4.6 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial


market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.



1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Wood Poles Stack poles stored for more than 2 weeks on decay-resisting skids arranged to support the poles without producing noticeable distortion. Store poles to permit free circulation of air; the bottom poles in the stack shall be at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not permit decayed or decaying wood to remain underneath stored poles. Do not drag treated poles along the ground. Do not use pole tongs, cant hooks, and other pointed tools capable of producing indentation more than one inch in depth in handling the poles. Do not apply tools to the groundline section of any pole.

1.5.2 Concrete Poles Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation.

1.5.3 Fiberglass Poles Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

1.5.4 Aluminum and Steel Poles Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

1.6 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1.6.1 Local/Regional Materials Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.


1.6.2 Environmental Data Submit Table 1 of ASTM E 2129 for the following products: Fluorescent and HID lamps shall have been submitted to and accepted by the State of Washington Department of Ecology as not being designated as hazardous waste. Copies of Department of Ecology letters of concurrence shall be submitted for each type and manufacturer of lamps used.

1.6.3 Energy Efficiency Per the Energy Policy Act of 2005, lighting shall be Energy Star or Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) qualified unless the Architect/Engineer or requirements generator submits a written finding of an exception as defined in the Energy Policy Act of 2005, Section 104, using the JOINT BASE LEWIS-MCCHORD CONSTRUCTION GREEN PROCUREMENT EXCEPTION FORM. Such justifications must be based on the inability to acquire a product that meets the functional requirements of the project or is cost-effective over the life of the product, taking energy cost savings into account. Justifications shall specify which of the exceptions is claimed (functional requirement or life cycle cost) and provide the basis and evidence for this determination. Life cycle cost determination shall rely on the life cycle cost analysis method in 10 CFR 436, Subpart A or another method determined to be equivalent by the Department of Defense. This efficiency requirement does not apply to products for which there is no Energy Star or FEMP standard. The Exception Form is available from the contracting official or the JBLM Green Procurement Program Coordinator (Building 1210, (253) 966-6466, [email protected]). The completed form shall be submitted via email (with copies of supporting documents included) to the Contracting Officer’s Representative. The following address shall be inserted in the carbon copy (“cc”) line of the email: [email protected]. Attached file sizes shall be kept to a minimum to avoid transmission errors associated with JBLM security. If use of email is not possible, the submitting party shall coordinate with the Contracting Officer’s Representative and ask that they forward copies of these documents to the JBLM Green Procurement Coordinator (Bldg 1210, 966-6466). More information can be found at http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?fuseaction=find_a_product. and http://www1.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_purchasingspecs.html. 1.7 WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back program. Collect information from the manufacturer about green lease options, and submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not landfill or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.



http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?fuseaction=find_a_product

http://www1.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_purchasingspecs.html


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION Products and materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION, Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.

2.2 LUMINAIRES UL 1598. Provide luminaires as indicated. Provide luminaires complete with lamps of number, type, and wattage indicated. Details, shapes, and dimensions are indicative of the general type desired, but are not intended to restrict selection to luminaires of a particular manufacturer. Luminaires of similar designs, light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable as approved.

2.2.1 Lamps 2.2.1.1 High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Lamps NEMA ANSLG C78.42. Wattage as indicated. HPS lamps shall have average rated life of 16,000 hours (minimum) for 35 watt lamps and 24,000 hours (minimum) for all higher wattage lamps. 150 watt lamps, if required, shall be 55 volt lamps. Lamps shall have Luminaire Efficiency Ratings (LER) as follows:



open fixture




open fixture



c. Upward efficiency of 11% to 20%

1. 150-399 watts: minimum 78 LER for open fixture

2. 400-999 watts: minimum 94 for open fixture

d. Upward efficiency greater than 20%



2.2.1.2 Standby HPS Lamps NEMA ANSLG C78.42. Wattage as indicated. Standby HPS lamps shall have two arc tubes and an average rated life of 40,000 hours (minimum). Hot restart instant lumen output shall be 8 percent, minimum, of total light output. 150 watt lamps, if required, shall be 55 volt type.

2.2.1.3 Metal-Halide Lamps Provide luminaires with tempered glass lens.

a. Double-ended, 70 watt, conforming to NEMA C78.1381

b. Single-ended, wattage as indicated, conforming to NEMA C78.43

Lamps shall have Luminaire Efficiency Ratings (LER) as follows:




open fixture

3. 1000+ watts: minimum 77 LER for closed fixture





c. Upward efficiency greater than 20%


open fixture

2. 400-999 watts: minimum 65 LER for closed fixture 2.2.2 Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge (HID) Luminaires UL 1029 and NEMA C82.4, and shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high power-factor type (minimum 90%). Provide single-lamp ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C. Ballasts shall be:

a. Designed to operate on voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average

life.


HID ballasts shall have a solid-state igniter/starter with an average life in the pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at the intended ambient temperature. Igniter case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C.

2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTOR NEMA ICS 2, electrically operated, mechanically held contactor with ratings as indicated. Provide in NEMA enclosure suitable for the environment and conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have silver alloy double-break contacts and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactor and shall require no arcing contacts. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.

2.4 TIME SWITCH Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset, and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 7 hours following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted in a NEMA enclosure suitable for the environment and conforming to NEMA ICS 6.

2.5 PHOTOCELL SWITCH UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated as stated in the Delivery or Task Order, 60 Hz with single pole double-throw (spdt) contacts for mechanically held contactors rated 1000 watt designed to fail to the ON position. Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 4 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition. Provide switch:

a. In a high-impact-resistant, noncorroding and nonconductive molded

plastic housing with a locking-type receptacle conforming to NEMA C136.10 and rated 1800 VA, minimum;

b. In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide,

rated 1800 VA, minimum;

c. In a U.V. stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and adjustable window slide, rated 1800 VA, minimum; or

d. Integral to the luminaire, rated 1000 VA, minimum.

2.6 POLES Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole. Poles shall be anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles, other than wood poles, shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws. Metal


poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.

2.6.1 Concrete Poles Provide concrete poles conforming to ASTM C 1089. Cross-sectional shape shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order.

2.6.1.1 Steel Reinforcing Prestressed concrete pole shafts shall be reinforced with steel prestressing members. Design shall provide internal longitudinal loading by either pretensioning or post tensioning of longitudinal reinforcing members.

2.6.1.2 Tensioned Reinforcing Primary reinforcement steel used for a prestressed concrete pole shaft shall be tensioned between 60 to 70 percent of its ultimate strength. The amount of reinforcement shall be such that when reinforcement is tensioned to 70 percent of its ultimate strength, the total resultant tensile force does not exceed the minimum section compressive strength of the concrete.

2.6.1.3 Coating and Sleeves for Reinforcing Members Where minimum internal coverage cannot be maintained next to required core openings, such as handhole and wiring inlet, reinforcing shall be protected with a vaporproof noncorrosive sleeve over the length without the 1/2 inch concrete coverage. Each steel reinforcing member which is to be post-tensioned shall have a nonmigrating slipper coating applied prior to the addition of concrete to ensure uniformity of stress throughout the length of such member.

2.6.1.4 Strength Requirement As an exception to the requirements of ASTM C 1089, poles shall be naturally cured to achieve a 28-day compressive strength of 7000 psi. Poles shall not be subjected to severe temperature changes during the curing period.

2.6.1.5 Shaft Preparation Completed prestressed concrete pole shaft shall have a hard, smooth, nonporous surface that is resistant to soil acids, road salts, and attacks of water and frost, and shall be clean, smooth, and free of surface voids and internal honeycombing. Poles shall not be installed for at least 15 days after manufacture.

2.6.2 Aluminum Poles Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188 inch wall thickness. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted, made of cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B 108/B 108M and shall be machined to


receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft and base shall be welded. Base cover shall be cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B 108/B 108M. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either 2024-T4 anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Manufacturer's standard provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.

2.6.3 Steel Poles AASHTO LTS. Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gage steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi with finish as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Pole mounting shall be as stated in the Delivery or Task Order. Poles shall have tapered tubular members, either round in cross section or polygonal. Pole markings shall be approximately 3 to 4 feet above grade and shall include manufacturer, year of manufacture, top and bottom diameters, and length.

2.6.4 Wood Poles ATIS O5.1 and RUS Bull 345-67. Poles shall be gained, bored, and roofed before treatment. Poles shall be treated full length with chromated copper arsenate (CCA) or ammoniacal copper arsenate (ACA) according to AWPA C1 and AWPA C4 as referenced in RUS Bull 345-67. Poles shall be branded by manufacturer with manufacturer's mark and date of treatment, height and class of pole, wood species, preservation code, and retention. Place the brand so that the bottom of the brand or disc is 10 feet from the pole butt for poles up to 50 feet long and 14 feet from the butt for poles over 50 feet long.

2.6.5 Fiberglass Poles ANSI C136.20. Designed specifically for supporting luminaires and having factory-formed cable entrance and handhole. Resin color shall be as indicated, and pigment shall provide uniform coloration throughout entire wall thickness. Finish surface shall be pigmented polyurethane having a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Polyurethane may be omitted if the surface layer of the pole is inherently ultraviolet inhibited. Minimum fiberglass content shall be 65 percent with resin and pigment comprising the other 35 percent material content.

2.7 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS NEMA C136.3, NEMA C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets shall be not less than 1 1/4 inch galvanized steel pipe or aluminum secured to pole. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated. Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street. Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.

2.8 POLE FOUNDATIONS


Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

2.9 AUXILIARY INSTANT-ON QUARTZ SYSTEM UL listed, automatically switched instant-on quartz lamp. Quartz lamp shall come on when the luminaire is initially energized and immediately after a momentary power outage, and remain on until HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output. Wiring for quartz lamp shall be internal to ballast and independent of incoming line voltage to the ballast. Provide instant-on quartz system as indicated.

2.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.10.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.10.2 Labels Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":

a. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin,

quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

b. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or

coated) for HID luminaires.

c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.

e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for

all luminaires. Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.

2.11 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Wood Poles Pole holes shall be at least as large at the top as at the bottom and shall be large enough to provide 4 inches of clearance between the pole and the side of the hole.

a. Setting depth: Pole setting depths shall be as follows:

Length of Pole (feet) Setting in Soil (feet) 20 5.0 25 5.5 30 5.5 35 6.0 40 6.0 45 6.5 50 7.0 55 7.5 60 8.0 b. Soil setting: "Setting in Soil" depths shall apply where pole holes are in soil, sand, or gravel or any combination of these. At corners, dead ends and other points of extra strain, poles 40 feet long or more shall be set 6 inches deeper.

c. Setting on sloping ground: On sloping ground, measure the depth of the hole from the low side of the hole.

d. Backfill: Tamp pole backfill for the full depth of the hole and mound

the excess fill around the pole. 3.1.2 Concrete Poles Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions.

3.1.3 Fiberglass Poles Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions.

3.1.4 Aluminum and Steel Poles Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide ornamental covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts. Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location.


3.1.5 Pole Setting Depth shall be as indicated. Poles in straight runs shall be in a straight line. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 6 inch maximum layers and thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away.

3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.7 GROUNDING Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.1.8 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section.



Documents

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL … · a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for